AT 80SL_60SL_e Roland Corporation 80SL Owner's Manual 60sl Om

User Manual: Pdf Roland Corporation AT-80SL Owner's Manual Roland Corporation - AT-80SL - Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 270 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

’04-3-1N03676590
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (Owner’s manual
p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s manual p. 5). These sections provide
important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in
order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by
your new unit, Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be
saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2004 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 1 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
2
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table except as specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
BROWN:
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
NEUTRAL
LIVE
For the U.K.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 2 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
3
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
..........................................................................................................
For AT-60SL
002a
• Do not open or perform any internal modifica-
tions on the unit.
..........................................................................................................
For AT-80SL
002b
• Do not open or perform any internal modifica-
tions on the unit. (The only exception would be
where this manual provides specific instructions
which should be followed in order to put in place
user-installable options; see p. 251.)
..........................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
007
•Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
008a
• The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating instruc-
tions, or as marked on the rear side of unit.
..........................................................................................................
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
011
•Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,
coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
..........................................................................................................
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 3 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
4
012a:
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the
power cord from the outlet, and request servicing
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page when:
• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
•The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013
• In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
015
•Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
016
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
For AT-80SL
022a
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power
cord before attempting installation of the light
bulbs (p. 20).
..........................................................................................................
026
• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.
..........................................................................................................
101a
• The unit should be located so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper venti-
lation.
..........................................................................................................
102b
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
103a:
•At regular intervals, you should unplug the power
plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all
dust and other accumulations away from its
prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug and
the power outlet can result in poor insulation and
lead to fire.
..........................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
107b
•Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from,
an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108d: Selection
• If you need to move the instrument, take note of
the precautions listed below. At least two persons
are required to safely lift and move the unit. It
should be handled carefully, all the while keeping
it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect
yourself from injury and the instrument from
damage.
• Check to make sure the knob bolt securing the
unit to the stand have not become loose. Fasten
them again securely whenever you notice any
loosening.
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Disconnect all cords coming from external
devices.
• Close the lid.
• Fold down the music stand.
..........................................................................................................
109a
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 20).
..........................................................................................................
110a
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
of the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
116
•Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do
not get your fingers pinched (p. 20). Adult super-
vision is recommended whenever small children
use the unit.
..........................................................................................................
118
• Should you remove the knob bolts, make sure to
put them in a safe place out of children's reach, so
there is no chance of them being swallowed
accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
For AT-80SL
118
• Should you remove screws and light bulbs, make
sure to put them in a safe place out of children’s
reach, so there is no chance of them being
swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 4 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
5
Important Notes
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2
and 3, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
301
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a
power supply noise filter between this unit and the
electrical outlet.
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
308
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the
POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the
unit has been completely disconnected from the source of
power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first
turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord
from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug
should be one that is within easy reach.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
ference.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-
ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
353
• Observe the following when using the unit’s floppy disk
drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using Floppy
Disks” (p. 6).
• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a
strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while
the drive is operating.
354b
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are used
while their light source is very close to the unit (such as a
piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the
same area of the unit for extended periods of time.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355b
• When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
356
• Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain
on the unit for long periods of time. Such objects can
discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
358
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard or
pedal board. This can be the cause of malfunction, such as
keys ceasing to produce sound.
359
•Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.
Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the
exterior finish.
Maintenance
401b
• To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is
slightly dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an
equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with the
grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area can
damage the finish.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Repairs and Data
452
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a floppy
disk, or written down on paper (when possible). During
repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related
to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
Additional Precautions
551
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the unit’s memory on a floppy disk.
552
•Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored on a floppy disk once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
555
•A small amount of noise may be heard from the display
during normal operation.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 5 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
6
Important Notes
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
557
•A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
normal operation.
558a
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
559b
• When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-
absorbent material. Transporting the unit without doing
so can cause it to become scratched or damaged, and
could lead to malfunction.
560
• Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in
use.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
Before Using Floppy Disks
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive
602
•Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from
vibration.
603
•Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the
drive and/or damage floppy disks. When the unit has
been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new
environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
604
• To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—
it will click into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT
button firmly. Do not use excessive force to remove a disk
which is lodged in the drive.
605a
• Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress,
since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable. (The disk drive’s indicator will
light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading
or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less
brightly lit, or be extinguished.)
606
• Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or
down.
607
•To prevent damage to the disk drive’s heads, always try to
hold the floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in any
direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in
firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.
608
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only floppy disks into the disk drive. Never insert any
other type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any
other foreign objects inside the drive.
Handling Floppy Disks
651
• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is
required to enable storage of large amounts of data on
such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity,
please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
•Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recom-
mended temperature range: 10 to 50° C (50 to 122° F).
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields,
such as those generated by loudspeakers.
652
• Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect
the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that
the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to
the WRITE position only when you wish to write new
data onto the disk.
653
• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the
disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the
drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
654
•Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and
to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By
using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the
disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.
655
• Disks containing performance data for this unit should
always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the
“Protect” position) before you insert them into the drive
on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the
HP-G, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a computer’s
drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab remains in the
“Write” position), when you perform any disk operations
using the other device’s disk drive (such as checking the
contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk rendering
the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk drive.
* GS ( ) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
ration.
204
* Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
207
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
210
*IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
203
* XG lite ( ) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo-
ration.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 6 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
7
Main Features
We want to take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland AT-80S Luxury/AT-60S Luxury “Atelier Series”
Organ. The AT-80S Luxury/AT-60S Luxury is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ
sounds. In addition, it is designed to be easy to learn and use. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard
for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.
* The AT-80S Luxury and AT-60S Luxury are abbreviated in this text as “AT-80SL” and “AT-60SL,”
respectively.
Basic concepts of the ATELIER series
A full complement of organ sounds
A wide range of basic organ sounds, ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ, are onboard so you are sure
to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ.
Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation
Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately, the operation buttons of the panel
are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions, ensuring easy and intuitive operation. All models of the
ATELIER series feature the same operability, allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models.
High-quality sounds that you can use without editing
In addition to a full range of organ sounds, high-quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard. You
can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organ—no need to perform complicated editing operations.
Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano-like expressiveness
Piano is indispensable to the performance of contemporary music. On the ATELIER series, the lower keyboard features an
expanded range that gives you the expressive power of a piano. The keyboard also features half-damper pedal capability
and initial touch sensitivity, both indispensable for piano performance.
All models provide high-quality grand piano sounds.
Design utilizes your existing music data
The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models, you will feel right at home and can begin playing
immediately. Data compatibility has also been carefully taken into account, and song data or registration data from earlier
models can be used without change.
Music styles from around the world
Many of the best-loved musical styles from around the world (rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns) are built
in, allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances.
Utilizes SMF music files
Compatible with GM2, the world standard in SMF music files, and equipped with its own floppy disk drive, the ATELIER
brings you access to the wealth of SMF music files available on the market. You can also mute parts, allowing you to
practice the part for each hand separately, and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 7 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
8
Main Features
Features
RSS reverb technology is used to create a high-quality ambience that surrounds the listener
(AT-80SL)
The AT-80SL provides an AUX OUT for RSS Ambience, allowing you to enjoy very high quality RSS reverb sound. In
addition, a speaker is built into the panel, ensuring that the performer will also enjoy the exceptional sound quality.
Highly Realistic Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment Functions
All rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers, featuring high-quality patterns with all the grooves
and subtle nuance of the real thing. In addition, you can use automatic accompaniments that are perfectly matched to each
rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background.
Active Expression sounds
For some of the sounds, moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone, or add other sounds.
From pianissimo to fortissimo, the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo, or strings
may appear behind the piano, creating dynamic changes in tonality.
“Music Assistant” and “Quick Registration” functions
The “Music Assistant” function makes it easy to recall appropriate rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a
desired atmosphere for your song. The “Quick Registration” function lets you use keywords to select wonderful
registrations created by top-ranking organists such as Hector Olivera.
Human voices and phrases
In addition to a full array of organ sounds, the ATELIER-S series provides human voices such as “Jazz Scat,” and human
voice phrases such as “Amen.”
Harmony Intelligence
The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you
play in the lower keyboard. This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance.
Rhythm Customize Function Lets You Arrange the Internal Rhythms
You can use the “Rhythm Customize” function to edit the internal rhythms, for example by adding a single cymbal at the
end or changing the drum tone in a pattern. You can also save edited rhythms to the instrument as well as to floppy disks.
76-note lower keyboard for plenty of range
The 76-note range can be split into zones, allowing a solo voice, pedal bass voice, percussion, etc., to be played
independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities. Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a
maximum of four parts, you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three-manual organ.
In addition, you can use the Drums/SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard.
Newly developed jazz organ style footage sound generator (AT-80SL)
The AT-80SL features a new “digital harmonic bar” function that lets you adjust the volume of each footage. In addition to
the rich sounds of the ATELIER series, you can enjoy the versatile tonal expressions of a jazz organ.
Music score display in the LCD screen
The large LCD screen allows recorded data or loaded music data to be displayed as a musical score. You can enjoy the
convenience of playing from a score, or checking the score of a song you recorded.
Furthermore, the instrument features a color LCD panel for great visibility and comfortable operation.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 8 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
9
Main Features
Video output of lyrics (AT-80SL)
You can connect a television to view the lyrics from SMF music files.
■
Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets (“[ ]”), as in [Harmony Intelligence] button.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• [+] [-], [
▲
] [
▼
], [ ] [ ] means that you should press one or the other button.
Example: Value [-][+] buttons, Reverb [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons, Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons.
• The text incorporates AT-80SL screen shots and panel diagrams. Thus, there will be some
portions where the information differs from that for the AT-60SL.
• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens
and colors.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”
• An asterisk (*) or a at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These
should not be ignored.
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
NOTE
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 9 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
10
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY...................................................................................................................... 3
Important Notes.......................................................................................................................................... 5
Main Features..........................................................................................7
Conventions Used in This Manual ............................................................................................... 9
Panel Descriptions................................................................................16
Before You Start Playing......................................................................20
Opening/Closing the Lid........................................................................................................................ 20
Setting Up the Music Rest ....................................................................................................................... 20
Connecting the Power Cord.................................................................................................................... 20
Turning the Power On and Off ..............................................................................................................20
Turning On the Power.................................................................................................................. 20
Turning Off the Power ................................................................................................................. 21
Using Headphones................................................................................................................................... 21
Using a Microphone.................................................................................................................................22
Turning On the Lights (AT-80SL) .......................................................................................................... 22
About the Bench ....................................................................................................................................... 23
Restoring All the Factory Default Settings ........................................................................................... 23
Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings................. 25
About the Display .................................................................................26
Understanding the Main and Related Screens .........................................................................26
Convenient Functions ..........................................................................30
Listening to the Demo Songs .................................................................................................................. 30
Music Assistant Function ........................................................................................................................ 32
Music Assistant Search.................................................................................................................34
Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection.......................................................................... 36
About the Quick Guide function............................................................................................................ 38
About the Index menu.................................................................................................................. 38
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds ...........................................40
Selecting Voices ........................................................................................................................................40
About the Voices and Parts .........................................................................................................40
Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons ....................................... 41
Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices...................................................................................... 42
Selecting Pedal Bass Voice........................................................................................................... 43
Selecting Solo Voice ...................................................................................................................... 44
Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button ............................................................................. 45
Performing with a Human Voice................................................................................................ 47
Performing with an Active Expression Voice........................................................................... 49
Creating Organ Sounds (Footage) (AT-80SL) ...................................................................................... 50
Adjust the Volume Balance.....................................................................................................................52
Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift) ............................................................................ 54
Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX) ...........56
Changing Drums/SFX Sets .........................................................................................................57
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 10 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
11
Contents
Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase
(Manual Percussion) ...............................................................................................................................58
Changing the Manual Percussion Sets.......................................................................................59
Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Hold)..............................................................................60
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance ...............................................61
Selecting a Rhythm................................................................................................................................... 61
Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory ................................................................................... 62
Rhythm Search............................................................................................................................... 63
Playing Rhythm........................................................................................................................................ 65
Starting at the Press of a Button.................................................................................................. 65
Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard
(Sync Start) ..................................................................................................................................... 66
Stopping the Rhythm.................................................................................................................... 67
Changing a Rhythm’s Tempo................................................................................................................. 67
Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro ................................................................................ 68
Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment .............................................................................. 68
Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment........................................................ 69
Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Style Orchestrator)..... 69
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering................................................................................................. 70
Leading Bass Function............................................................................................................................. 72
A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program)................... 74
Using a Rhythm from a Disk .................................................................................................................. 76
Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk......................................................................................... 76
Reviewing the Styles on a Music Style Disk ............................................................................. 77
Copying Rhythms on Disks into User Memory................................................................................... 78
Restoring the Rhythm Stored in the User Memory to Their Original Factory Settings................. 80
Copying Rhythms Saved in User Memory to Floppy Disks.............................................................. 81
Changing the Order of the Rhythms Stored in User Memory........................................................... 83
Changing the Names of Rhythms Stored in User Memory ............................................................... 85
Deleting Rhythms Stored in User Memory ..........................................................................................87
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons .........................................89
Storing Registrations................................................................................................................................ 90
Recalling a Registration........................................................................................................................... 91
How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED) ................................................................................ 91
How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT) ................................................................................. 91
Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations...................................................................... 92
Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings............................................................ 93
Assigning a Name to a Registration Set................................................................................................ 94
Formatting Disks ...................................................................................................................................... 96
Saving Registration Sets to a Floppy Disk............................................................................................ 98
Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the AT-80SL/60SL............................................ 101
Loading a Set of Registrations................................................................................................... 101
Loading an Individual Registration ......................................................................................... 103
Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the Floppy Disk (Load Next)... 106
Deleting a Set of Registrations from a Floppy Disk .......................................................................... 108
Changing the Order of Registration on Floppy Disk........................................................................ 110
Using Registrations Created on an Earlier Model............................................................................. 111
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 11 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
12
Contents
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions...................................114
Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose) ..............................................................................114
Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound................................................................................................ 115
Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal)..................................................................................... 115
Pitch Bend and Vibrato Effects.............................................................................................................116
Using the Foot Switches ........................................................................................................................ 117
Changing the Function of the Foot Switch.............................................................................. 118
Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations....................................................................... 119
Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal ............................................................. 120
Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal.........................................................................121
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound...........................122
Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence) .................................................................. 122
Changing the Type of Harmony Intelligence .........................................................................122
Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect)............................................................................. 124
Rotary Speed................................................................................................................................ 125
Rotary Color................................................................................................................................. 126
Chorus Effect........................................................................................................................................... 127
Sustain Effect........................................................................................................................................... 128
Changing the Sustain Length .................................................................................................... 129
Reverb Effect ........................................................................................................................................... 130
Changing the Reverb Type........................................................................................................131
Changing the Wall Type ............................................................................................................ 132
Changing the Depth of the Reverb........................................................................................... 133
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively............................135
Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard................................................................................... 135
Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button) ................................... 137
Changing How the Solo Voice Responds................................................................................ 138
Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice .............................................................................. 138
Changing the Solo Split Point ................................................................................................... 139
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice ([Bass Split] Button) ....................................... 140
Changing the Bass Split Point ................................................................................................... 141
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button)............................ 142
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play .........................143
What is a Track Button? ............................................................................................................. 144
Displaying the Track Buttons.................................................................................................... 145
Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk and SMF Music Files .......................... 145
Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute).............................................................................................. 147
Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data .................................................................... 148
Viewing a Notation ................................................................................................................................ 149
Changing the Notation Settings................................................................................................ 150
Recording a Performance ...................................................................................................................... 152
Playing Back a Performance Song........................................................................................................ 153
Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In Play) .............................................................. 153
Recording Each Part Separately ........................................................................................................... 154
Re-Recording........................................................................................................................................... 155
Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear) .......................................................................................... 156
Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename) .................................................................... 156
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 12 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
13
Contents
Saving Performance Songs Onto Floppy Disk................................................................................... 158
Loading Performance Songs Into the AT-80SL/60SL....................................................................... 159
Deleting Performance Songs Stored on Disk...................................................................................... 160
Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files ............................................................................ 161
Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song .................................... 162
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording)...................................................... 162
Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording) .................................................................. 163
Count-In Recording................................................................................................................................ 164
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data .........................165
Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure)................................................................................... 165
Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track) ............................................................................ 166
Erase Recording (Erase Event) ............................................................................................................. 168
Copying Measures (Copy) .................................................................................................................... 170
Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize) ............................................................................................. 171
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms..................173
Preparations for Creating User Rhythms............................................................................................ 174
Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen.............................................................................. 174
Selecting the Division ................................................................................................................. 175
Loading the Rhythm................................................................................................................... 176
Making the Division Settings .................................................................................................... 177
Editing the Rhythm..................................................................................................................... 178
Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used ....................................................................... 181
Deleting Rhythms You Have Created...................................................................................... 182
Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename).................................................................. 182
Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or Floppy Disk ............................................................183
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings ...................................................184
Adjusting How the Instrument Responds.......................................................................................... 184
Turning Aftertouch On/Off ...................................................................................................... 184
Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch........................................................................................... 184
Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity .................................................................................... 185
Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony...................................................................................... 185
Performance Function Settings............................................................................................................. 186
Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Damper Pedal will Apply................................. 186
Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal ....................................................................186
Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever will Apply............ 187
Changing the Pitch Bend Range ............................................................................................... 188
Rhythm Settings...................................................................................................................................... 188
Turning Chord Hold On/Off....................................................................................................188
Count Down Sound .................................................................................................................... 189
Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically...............................................189
Registration Settings .............................................................................................................................. 190
Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled.......................................... 190
Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled.................................. 190
Composer settings.................................................................................................................................. 191
Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off .............................................................................. 191
Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Play Transpose).......................................... 191
Changing the Metronome Setting............................................................................................. 192
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 13 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
14
Contents
Adjusting the Metronome Volume........................................................................................... 192
Changing the Sound of the Metronome .................................................................................. 193
Setting the Beat............................................................................................................................ 193
Other Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 194
Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune)................................................................................194
Mic Echo ....................................................................................................................................... 194
Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers................................................................................... 195
Setting the PC Number............................................................................................................... 195
MIDI IN Mode............................................................................................................................. 196
Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel...................................................................................... 196
Repositioning the Touch Screen................................................................................................ 197
Displaying a Graphic at Power-up (AT-80SL)........................................................................ 198
Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory....................................................................... 199
Switching the Background of the Main Screen....................................................................... 200
Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen............................................................ 201
Using the V-LINK function ....................................................................................................... 201
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device...................................203
Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-80SL) ................................................................. 203
Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-60SL) ................................................................. 204
Connecting to Audio Equipment......................................................................................................... 205
Connecting a Computer ........................................................................................................................206
Connecting a MIDI Devices....................................................................................................... 207
Connecting MIDI Devices ..................................................................................................................... 208
Connecting a Television to View the Lyrics (AT-80SL).................................................................... 209
Switching the TV Format ........................................................................................................... 209
Connecting External Speakers or an external Reverb Unit to Broaden the Reverb
(RSS Reverb) (AT-80SL)......................................................................................................................... 210
Switching the Aux Out On/OFF ..............................................................................................210
Switching the Aux Out Mode.................................................................................................... 210
Appendices
Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................... 213
Error Message ......................................................................................................................................... 218
Voice List (AT-80SL) .............................................................................................................................. 220
Voice List (AT-60SL) .............................................................................................................................. 223
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL) ............................................................................................................ 225
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL) ............................................................................................................ 229
Manual Percussion List (AT-80SL) ...................................................................................................... 233
Manual Percussion List (AT-60SL) ...................................................................................................... 234
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function) ............................................................................... 235
Rhythm List (AT-80SL).......................................................................................................................... 242
Rhythm List (AT-60SL).......................................................................................................................... 244
Music Style Disk List (AT-80SL/60SL)................................................................................................ 246
Chord List................................................................................................................................................ 247
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 249
About ATELIER Series Sound Generator................................................................................ 250
Replacing the Illumination Bulbs (AT-80SL Only)............................................................................ 251
Before you continue.................................................................................................................... 251
Required items............................................................................................................................. 251
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 14 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
15
Contents
Panel illumination....................................................................................................................... 251
Remplacement des ampoules (AT-80SL)............................................................................................ 253
Avant de poursuivre le remplacement .................................................................................... 253
Outils nécessaires........................................................................................................................ 253
Éclairage du panneau ................................................................................................................. 253
Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off.................................................................. 255
Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off ...................................................... 255
Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons............................................................255
Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons ........................................ 255
Demo Song List....................................................................................................................................... 257
Short Cut List .......................................................................................................................................... 260
Main Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 261
Index......................................................................................................................................................... 264
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 15 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
16
Panel Descriptions
1.
[Power On] switch
→
p. 20
2.
Panel Speaker
3.
Part Balance [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
Part Balance Indicator
4.
Pedal Bass Voice select buttons
→
p. 43
Pedal Organ Part
Pedal Orchestral Part
[To Lower] button
→
p. 142
[Bass Split] button
→
p. 140
5.
Lower Voice select buttons
→
p. 42
Lower Organ Part
Lower Symphonic Part
Lower Orchestral Part
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
Level indicator
→
p. 52
6.
Touch Screen
→
p. 26
7.
Harmony Intelligence button
→
p. 122
8.
Transpose [-] [+] buttons
→
p. 114
9.
Composer
→
p. 143
[Reset] button
[Play/Stop] button
[Rec] button
→
p. 143
[Song] button
[Registration] button
→
p. 101
[Demo] button
→
p. 30, p. 146
10.
Floppy Disk Drive
→
p. 76, p. 96, p. 145
11.
Upper Voice select buttons
→
p. 42
Upper Organ Part
Upper Symphonic Part
Upper Orchestral Part
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
Level indicator
→
p. 52
12.
Solo Voice select buttons
→
p. 44
Solo Part
[To Lower] button
→
p. 137
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
Level indicator
→
p. 52
Break
FullBasic Advanced
1
Advanced
2
To
Var iation To
Original
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Fast/
Slow
Hold
Lower
1
Lower
2
Lower
3
Theater Theater
12
Pipe Pipe Pipe
123
Full
3
Full
2
Full
1
French
Horn
Strings BrassPiano
Harp
Harpsi
A.Guitar
Accordion
Harmonica
E.Piano
Vibes
Marimba
Theater
Organ
1
Organ
2
Octave
Up
Pipe Electric Bass &
Cymbal
Octave
Up
String
Contrabass
Set
Sync
Start
Stop
Start /
Intro/
Ending
Count
Down
Lower UpperPedal
Manual
Perc
Drums /
SFX
WorldBallad
March
Showtime
Swing
Latin
Acoustic
BigBand
Gospel
Contempo
Country Oldies
Waltz Tr ad
Choir
Orchestral
Brilliance
Master
Volume Rotary
Sound
On/Off
Min
Max
Mellow
Bright
Bender
Vibrato
Level Level Level
Alternate Alternate Alternate
Rotary Sound
Lower
Symphonic
Organ
SustainVoice
Lower OrchestralOrgan
Pedal
TempoStyle Orchestrator
Program
One Touch
Lower
To
Bass
Split
Fill In
Standard
Reverb SMF Rhythm Organ
Pedal
Orch
Accomp /
Power On
Rhythm
Arranger
On / Off
Lower
123
Write
Manual
53 4 6
2
1
AT-80SL
18
13
15
14
16
19
20
17
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 16 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
17
Panel Descriptions
13.
Lower
[Drums/SFX] button
→
p. 56
[Manual Perc] button
→
p. 58
14.
Lower Voice [Hold] button
→
p. 60
15.
Sustain
→
p. 128
[Pedal] button
[Lower] button
[Upper] button
16.
Rhythm select buttons
→
p. 61
Style Orchestrator buttons
→
p. 69
Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons
→
p. 67
Fill In [To Variation] button
→
p. 69
Fill In [To Original] button
→
p. 69
[Break] button
→
p. 69
[Count Down] button
→
p. 68
[Intro/Ending] button
→
p. 65, p. 66, p. 67
[Sync Start] button
→
p. 66
[Start/Stop] button
→
p. 65, p. 67
Arranger [On/Off] button
→
p. 68
[One Touch Program] button
→
p. 74
17.
[Brilliance] slider
→
p. 115
18.
[Master Volume] slider
→
p. 20
19.
[Bender/Vibrato] lever
→
p. 116
20.
Rotary Sound
→
p. 124
[On/Off] button
[Fast/Slow] button
21.
Registration buttons
[Write] button
→
p. 90
[Manual] button
→
p. 93
Registration [1]–[12] buttons
→
p. 89
[Load Next] button
→
p. 106
TheaterPipe Pipe Pipe Theater
12
Jazz
1
Jazz
2
Jazz
3
123
Full Full Full
123
Synth
Strings
Slow
Strings
Strings
Horn
French
Sax
Violin Trumpet
Flute Oboe
Clarinet
BrassPiano
Vibes
Marimba
Accordion
Harmonica
A.Guitar
E.Piano
E.Guitar
Mandolin
Banjo
Harp
Harpsi
Choir
Level Level Level Level
Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate To Lower
Orchestral
Rotary Sound
Upper
Symphonic
Organ
Solo
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Transpose
Harmony Intelligence
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Load
Next
21
12
2
117
8 9 10
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 17 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
18
Panel Descriptions
1.
[Power On] switch
→
p. 20
2.
Panel Speaker
3.
Part Balance [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
4.
Pedal Bass Voice select buttons
→
p. 43
Pedal Organ Part
Pedal Orchestral Part
[To Lower] button
→
p. 142
[Bass Split] button
→
p. 140
5.
Lower Voice select buttons
→
p. 42
Lower Organ Part
Lower Symphonic Part
Lower Orchestral Part
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
6.
Touch Screen
→
p. 26
7.
[Harmony Intelligence] button
→
p. 122
8.
Transpose [-] [+] buttons
→
p. 114
9.
Composer
→
p. 143
[Reset] button
[Play/Stop] button
[Rec] button
→
p. 143
[Song] button
[Registration] button
→
p. 101
[Demo] button
→
p. 30, p. 146
10.
Floppy Disk Drive
→
p. 76, p. 96, p. 145
11.
Upper Voice select buttons
→
p. 42
Upper Organ Part
Upper Symphonic Part
Upper Orchestral Part
[Alternate] button
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
12.
Solo Voice select buttons
→
p. 44
Solo Part
[Alternate] button
[To Lower] button
→
p. 137
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons
→
p. 52
Brilliance
Master
Volume Rotary
Sound
On/Off
Min
Max
Mellow
Bright
Bender
Vibrato
Level Level Level
AlternateAlternate Alternate
Reverb SMF Rhythm Organ
Pedal
Orch
Accomp /
Power On
Rhythm Style Orchestrator
Program
One Touch
Fill In
Pedal
SustainLower
Tempo
Standard
Upper
Lower
Split
To
Bass
Manual
Perc LowerPedalHold
World
Latin
Ballad
ShowtimeMarch Acoustic
Waltz Tra d
Swing
Big Band
Gospel
Country
Contempo
Oldies
Full
12
Advanced
Basic
Lower
Voice
Drums
SFX
Orchestral
Organ Arranger
On Off
To
Var iation To
Original
Set
Sync
Start
Stop
Start /
Intro/
Ending
Count
Down
Organ
1
Organ
2
Pipe Electric
String
Contrabass
Fast/
Slow
Lower
1
Lower
2
Lower
3
12
Pipe
Full
French
Horn
Strings
Choir
BrassPiano
Harp
Harpsi
A.Guitar
Accordion
Harmonica
E.Piano
Vibes
Marimba
Theater Theater
Symphonic
Organ
Rotary Sound
Lower
Orchestral
1 2 3
Write
Manual
18
19
17
20
53 4 6
1
2
13
15
14
16
AT-60SL
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 18 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
19
Panel Descriptions
13.
Lower
[Drums/SFX] button
→
p. 56
[Manual Perc] button
→
p. 58
14.
Lower Voice [Hold] button
→
p. 60
15.
Sustain
→
p. 128
[Pedal] button
[Lower] button
[Upper] button
16.
Rhythm select buttons
→
p. 61
Style Orchestrator buttons
→
p. 69
Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons
→
p. 67
Fill In [To Variation] button
→
p. 69
Fill In [To Original] button
→
p. 69
[Count Down] button
→
p. 68
[Intro/Ending] button
→
p. 65, p. 66, p. 67
[Sync Start] button
→
p. 66
[Start/Stop] button
→
p. 65, p. 67
Arranger [On/Off] button
→
p. 68
[One Touch Program] button
→
p. 74
17.
[Brilliance] slider
→
p. 115
18.
[Master Volume] slider
→
p. 20
19.
[Bender/Vibrato] lever
→
p. 116
20.
Rotary Sound
→
p. 124
[On/Off] button
[Fast/Slow] button
21.
Registration buttons
[Write] button
→
p. 90
[Manual] button
→
p. 93
Registration [1]–[8] buttons
→
p. 89
[Load Next] button
→
p. 106
Level Level Level Level
To L o w e r
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Transpose
Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate
Harmony Intelligence
Synth
Strings
Slow
Strings
Strings
Horn Choir
French
Sax
Tr u m pet
Flute
BrassPiano
Vibes
Marimba
Accordion
Harmonica
Guitar
Harp
Harpsi
E.Piano
Theater
Jazz
Pipe
2
2
Full
Pipe
1
Full
1
Full
3
Symphonic
Organ
Rotary Sound
Upper
Orchestral
Solo
4 5678
Load
Next
2
8 9 10
12
2
117
21
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 19 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
20
Before You Start Playing
Opening/Closing the Lid
fig.00-22
1.
To open the lid, hold it with both hands and lift it
straight up. Then, slide it to the rear.
2.
To close the lid, slowly pull it forward until it
stops. Then, gently lower it into place.
NOTE
Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or
closing the lid. Adult supervision is recommended when
small children are going to be using the instrument.
NOTE
To prevent accidents, be sure to close the lid before moving
the organ.
Make sure you don’t have anything (such as sheet music) on
the keyboard when you close the lid.
Setting Up the Music Rest
fig.00-23
1.
Lift the music rest gently.
2.
To collapse the music rest, fold in the metal
fittings while supporting the music rest with
hand and gently fold down the stand.
NOTE
Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest.
Connecting the Power Cord
1.
First, make sure that the [Power On] switch at the
panel’s left side is OFF (not pushed in).
fig. 00-27
2.
Connect the supplied power cord to the AC Inlet
connector, then plug the other end into an AC
outlet.
NOTE
Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument.
NOTE
Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for
extended periods of time, pull out the power cord from the
AC outlet.
Turning the Power On and
Off
NOTE
Once the connections have been completed, turn on or off
power to your various devices in the order specified. By
turning on or off devices in the wrong order, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other
devices.
■
Turning On the Power
1.
Make sure of the following before the power is
turned on.
• Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC inlet?
• Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC outlet?
• Is the [Master Volume] slider (located at the left of the
Lower Keyboard) set to the Min (minimum) position?
fig.00-26
(2)
(2)
(1)
OFF
Upper position
Master
Volume
Min
Max
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 20 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
21
Before You Start Playing
2.
Press the [Power On] button to turn on the power.
fig. 00-27
The Power indicator lights in red.
NOTE
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the
unit will operate normally.
3.
The [Master Volume] slider located on the left of
the Lower Keyboard panel is an overall control
for adjusting the volume of the entire instrument.
Now adjust the [Master Volume] slider to a suitable
level. The volume will be increased when the Expression
Pedal is pressed down, and decreased when the pedal is
returned.
fig.00-28
■
Turning Off the Power
1.
Before switching the power off, set the [Master
Volume] slider to the Min (minimum) position.
2.
Press the [Power On] button to turn off the power.
fig. 00-27
Using Headphones
The AT-80SL/60SL features a Phones jack. This allows you to
play without having to worry about bothering others around
you, even at night.
fig.00-29
1.
Connect your headphones to the [Phones] jack
underneath the left side of the keyboard.
The sound from the built-in speakers stops.
Now, sound is heard only through the headphones.
fig.00-30
2.
Adjust the headphones volume with the [Master
Volume] slider and Expression pedal.
Accepts connection of Stereo headphones.
Some Notes on Using Headphones
fifig.00-31
• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones
only by the headset or the plug.
• Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high
when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the AT-
80SL/60SL before plugging in headphones.
• To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or
damage to the headphones, the headphones should not
be used at an excessively high volume. Use the
headphones at a moderate volume level.
Power On
ON
Lower position
Power Indicator
increase
the volume
decrease
the volume
Master
Volume
Min
Max
Power On
OFF
Upper position
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 21 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
22
Before You Start Playing
Using a Microphone
The AT-80SL/60SL is equipped with a Mic jack.
Since this instrument has a Mic In jack, you can use a
microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing
along with your performance, or singing along with SMF
music files (sold separately).
fig.00-32
1.
Connect your microphone to the [Mic In] jack
underneath the left side of the keyboard.
2.
Use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the volume
level for the microphone.
You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from
the microphone (p. 194).
The microphone must be purchased separately. When
purchasing a microphone, please consult the vender where
you bought the AT-80SL/60SL.
NOTE
(AT-80SL only)
If the Input switch is set to “RSS,” RSS reverb will be applied
to the sound from the microphone. You can use the [Mic
Volume] knob to adjust the microphone volume (p. 210).
Some Notes on Using a Microphone
fig.00-31
• To avoid disturbing others, be careful of the volume
level when playing late at night or very early in the
morning.
•When connecting a microphone to the AT-80SL/60SL, be
sure to lower the volume. If the volume control is too
high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be
produced by the speakers.
• Howling could be produced depending on the location
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
• Changing the orientation of the microphone.
• Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the
speakers.
• Lowering volume levels.
Turning On the Lights (AT-80SL)
After turning on the power, turn on the [Illumination] switch
(located underneath the left-hand side of the keyboard).
fig. 00-33
The panel illumination of the instrument will light.
Cautions When Using Illumination
fig.00-31
When the illumination is used for an extended period, the
light bulbs and the metal parts near the light bulb (see
diagram below) will become hot. Be careful not to touch
these areas. In particular, be careful of the following
locations.
1.
Panel illumination light bulb
Do not touch the light bulb or nearby parts. When
closing the lid, be sure to hold the handles.
2.
Metal fittings of the cover
After closing the lid, do not touch this area.
The bulbs used for illumination can be replaced. For details
on replacing a bulb, refer to
“Replacing the Illumination
Bulbs (AT-80SL Only)”
(p. 251).
fig.00-35
Illumination
On
1
2
Illumination Switch
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 22 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
23
Before You Start Playing
About the Bench
The bench seat can be opened, and sheet music and other
items can be stored inside.
Caution When Using the Bench
fig.00-31
When opening/closing the seat, be careful not to pinch your
fingers.
fig.00-36
Restoring All the Factory
Default Settings
You can restore all of the settings stored in the AT-80SL/
60SL to what they were when the instrument shipped from
the factory. This function is called “Factory Reset.”
1.
Make sure there is no floppy disk in the disk
drive before carrying out the procedure.
2.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
fig.00-37.eps
3.
In the System screen, touch <Utility> to open the
Utility screen.
fig.00-38.eps
4.
In the Utility screen, touch <Factory Reset>.
fig.00-39.eps
To restore all settings other than the User memory (p. 62) to
their original factory settings, touch <Panel Reset>.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 23 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
24
Before You Start Playing
The confirmation message appears on screen.
fig.00-40.eps
If you touch <Cancel>, the Factory Reset will not be
performed, and you will return to the System screen.
5.
When you touch <OK>, the Factory Reset
operation will begin, and the settings will return
to the factory-set condition.
NOTE
Never switch off the power while this operation is in
progress!
fig.00-40.eps
NOTE
Loading factory default settings will erase any Registrations
currently in the memory of the AT-80SL/60SL. To save the
registrations you are currently using, refer to
“Saving
Registration Sets to a Floppy Disk”
(p. 98).
NOTE
To reset only the User memory (p. 62) to its original factory
settings, refer to p. 78.
2. Turn down the volume to the minimum level,
then turn off the power.
3. While holding down the [One Touch
Program] button, press the [Power On] switch
to turn the power on.
fig.00-41
The following screen appears.
fig.00-40.eps
NOTE
Never switch off the power while this operation is in
progress!
Power On Program
One Touch
Set
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 24 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
25
Before You Start Playing
Restoring All Settings Other
Than the User Memory to the
Original Factory Settings
You can restore all of the settings other than the User
memory (p. 62) to their original factory settings.
This function is called “Panel Reset.”
1.
Make sure there is no floppy disk in the disk
drive before carrying out the procedure.
2.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
fig.00-37.eps
3.
In the System screen, touch <Utility> to open the
Utility screen.
fig.00-38.eps
4.
In the Utility screen, touch <Panel Reset>.
fig.00-39.eps
The confirmation message appears on screen.
fig.00-40.eps
If you touch <Cancel>, the Panel Reset will not be
performed, and you will return to the System screen.
5.
When you touch <OK>, the Panel Reset operation
will begin, and the settings will return to the
factory-set condition.
NOTE
Never switch off the power while this operation is in
progress!
fig.00-40.eps
NOTE
To reset only the User memory (p. 62) to its original factory
settings, refer to p. 80.
What is the User Memory?
The User memory is the area within the instrument
where User rhythms you create as well as rhythms from
Music Style Disks are stored.
You can also copy rhythms (p. 78) saved on floppy disks
to the User memory.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 25 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
26
About the Display
The AT-80SL/60SL makes use of a Touch Screen. This lets you carry out a
wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly.
■
Understanding the Main and Related Screens
Main Screen
fig.04-02
Number Explanations
1Tempo
2 Measure
3 Beat
4Bouncing Ball
A ball will bounce in time with the rhythm or song.
5Transpose
Displays the transpose setting.
6Chord Name
Displays the name of the chord that is played in the lower keyboard.
7
Indication button
Pressed to choose which name to have indicated; either the Rhythm
Name, Song Name, or Registration Name.
8Rhythm Name/Song Name/Registration Name
9Digital H-Bar (AT-80SL only)
You can display the Footage screen (p. 50).
10 Voice Name
Displays the name of the upper keyboard voice.
11 MUSIC ASSIST (Music Assistant)
Press this when you want to use the Music Assistant function (p. 32).
12 Sound/Kbd (Sound/Keyboard)
Select a voice (tone), or make settings for the effect depth, keyboard, etc.
NOTE
The explanations in this
manual include
illustrations that depict
what should typically be
shown by the display.
Note, however, that your
unit may incorporate a
newer, enhanced version of
the system (e.g., includes
newer sounds), so what
you actually see in the
display may not always
match what appears in the
manual.
NOTE
The Touch Screen is
operated by touching it
lightly with your finger.
Pressing hard, or using a
hard object can damage the
Touch Screen. Be careful
not to press too hard, and
be sure to use only your
fingers to operate the
Touch Screen.
NOTE
The positioning of the
Touch Screen may become
displaced due to changes in
the surrounding
environment and over
time. If this happens,
follow the steps in
“Repositioning the Touch
Screen” (p. 197) to correct
the pointer position.
NOTE
Do not place items on the
touch screen.
You can adjust the
b
rightness of the screen (p.
203, p. 204).
You can set the Main screen
so that the bouncing ball
does not appear (p. 201).
2
8
9
12
15
11
14
17
10
7
134 5
1613
6
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 26 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
27
About the Display
13
Rhythm
Play the internal rhythms, and play disk rhythms or copy them in internal
memory. Rhythm-related settings can also be made here.
14
Registration
Load registrations from disk into internal memory, or save registrations to
disk. Registration-related settings can also be made here.
15
Rec/Play
Play back or record a song. You can also view a score display while a song
plays.
16 System
Make various settings.
17
Quick Guide
Displays the Quick Guide screen. While the Quick Guide screen is
displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump
to the related setting screen (p. 38).
This icon is displayed when the V-LINK function is on.
➝
V-LINK function (p. 201)
This icon is displayed when the instrument contains SMF music
files.
This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has
been altered.
This icon appears in the display when an Active Expression voice is
selected.
➝
Active Expression Voice (p. 49)
This icon appears in the display when an EX voice is selected.
➝
Ex Voice (p. 45)
Number Explanations
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 27 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
28
About the Display
About the principal icons and the Utility screen
Sub-windows
You can touch <Registration> in the Main screen or <Utility> in other
screens to access a screen like the following.
This type of screen is called a “sub-window.”
Button Meaning
Depending on the function, some screens are spread over
multiple pages.
You can touch < >< > < >< > to display
the next or previous page of the screen.
Touch this when you want to exit (close) the currently
displayed screen. Normally, touching < > several
times takes you back to the Main screen.
When you touch a menu in
the sub-window, the sub-
window will close, and the
selected menu screen will
appear.
In a sub-window, touch
<Exit> to exit the sub-
window.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 28 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
29
About the Display
Sub-windows for setting values
When you are making settings in the System screen, the following type of
screen appears.
Return to the factory settings.
Modify the value.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 29 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
30
Convenient Functions
Listening to the Demo Songs
The AT-80SL/60SL provides demo songs. Here’s how to play the Demo
songs, and fully appreciate the sounds, Rhythms, and Automatic
Accompaniment that are available with the AT-80SL/60SL.
fig.01-01
1.
Make sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the disk drive.
If a floppy disk is in the disk drive, press the Eject button and remove the
floppy disk.
2.
Press the [Demo] button to make the indicator light.
The Demo Screen appears.
3.
Touch < > or < > on screen to select the demo song.
4.
Touch < > to start playback of the demo song.
When the selected demo song ends, the next demo song will begin playing.
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
For details on the composer
of each demo song and
their profiles, refer to
“Demo Song List” (p.
257).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 30 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
31
Convenient Functions
5.
Touch < > to stop playback of the demo song.
6.
Press the [Demo] button to exit the demonstration screen.
If the following screen appears
If the performance song in the unit has not been saved to floppy disk, the
following message appears, and it will not be possible to play the Demo
songs.
fig.E-62
1.
If you want to delete the performance data, touch <OK>.
If you do not want to delete the performance data, touch <Cancel>.
You can play/stop the
demo songs by pressing the
panel [Play/Stop] button.
The performance data can
b
e saved on a floppy disk.
If you wish to save the
musical data to a floppy
disk, refer to “Saving
Performance Songs Onto
Floppy Disk” (p. 158).
NOTE
All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use of this
material for purposes other
than private, personal
enjoyment is a violation of
applicable laws.
NOTE
The data for the Demo song
that is being played is not
available at the MIDI Out
connector.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 31 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
32
Convenient Functions
Music Assistant Function
A collection of the world’s best, most well-known songs were carefully
selected, then the optimum panel settings for each of them were
determined, and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument.
Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the
song you have in mind, and a rhythm performance, a sound for the melody,
and other selections will be made for you. Once you’ve selected a keyword,
all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing.
1.
Display the Main screen.
2.
Touch <MUSIC ASSIST> on the Main screen.
The Music Assistant screen appears.
If some other screen is
displayed, touch <Exit> to
close the currently open
screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 32 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
33
Convenient Functions
3.
Touch < >< > to switch screens, and touch a keyword
appropriate for the character of the song.
The Registration buttons [1]–[4] flash.
Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up
for the Registration [1]–[4] buttons.
4.
On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.
At the moment you play the keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the
Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.
5.
Press a Registration button from [1] through [4] to switch the
panel settings.
6.
To end the Music Assistant function, press the [One Touch
Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 33 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
34
Convenient Functions
■
Music Assistant Search
You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a
Music Assistant search.
1.
Touch <MUSIC ASSIST> on the Main screen.
The Music Assistant screen appears.
2.
Touch <Search> on the Music Assistant screen.
A sub-window appears.
Searching by Music Assistant name
3.
Touch <By Name>.
If some other screen is
displayed, touch <Exit> to
close the currently open
screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 34 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
35
Convenient Functions
4.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”
→
“B”
→
“C”...).
Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The results of the search appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
6.
Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Music Assistant screen.
Searching by conditions
3.
Touch <By Conditions>.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Tempo,” “Rhythm,”
“Genre,” and “Scene.”
4.
Touch the value for the search term.
5.
Touch < >< > to adjust the settings.
6.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The results of the search appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
7.
Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Music Assistant screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 35 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
36
Convenient Functions
Choose a Keyword for Quick
Registration Selection
You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from
keywords representing your situation, location, musical genre, etc. You can
call up registrations created by top-level organists, and refer to them for
hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own
registrations.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
2.
Touch <Quick Registration>.
The Quick Registration screen appears.
3.
Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 36 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
37
Convenient Functions
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a Quick Registration group.
4.
In the sub-window, touch a sound Quick Registration group
name to select the desired Quick Registration group.
The sub-window closes, and the Quick Registration screen returns to the
display.
5.
Touch <Upper>, <Lower>, or <Pedal>, switching the
respective button’s indicator on or off, to select the keyboard
to which the voice is to be assigned.
6.
Touch < >< > to switch pages, and touch the desired
keyword.
The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if you want to make any further changes in the voice
setting.
Setting Keyboard for which you select a voice
Upper Upper keyboard
Lower Lower keyboard
Pedal Pedalboard
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 37 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
38
Convenient Functions
About the Quick Guide function
The AT-80SL/60SL offers a Quick Guide function, which makes it easy for
you to access various functions. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed,
you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related
setting screen.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen.
The following Quick Guide screen appears for several seconds.
2.
While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, press a button,
keyboard, pedal, or foot switch.
You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button,
keyboard, pedal, or foot switch that you pressed.
3.
Make settings in the screen to which you jumped.
4.
When you are finished making settings, touch <Exit> to
close the screen.
The Main screen appears.
■
About the Index menu
In the Quick Guide screen, you can touch <index> to access the Index Menu.
In the Index Menu screen, you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting
screen for that keyword.
1.
Touch <Quick Guide> on the Main screen.
The following Quick Guide screen.
For more on keys, buttons,
and controllers that can be
used with the Quick Guide
function, refer to “Settings
That Are Stored After the
Power Is Turned Off” (p.
255).
If some other screen is
displayed, touch <Exit> to
close the currently open
screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 38 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
39
Convenient Functions
2.
While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, touch <index>.
The following screen appears.
3.
Touch a letter of the alphabet A–W to select the first letter of
the desired keyword.
The Quick Guide Index screen appears, and the keywords will be displayed.
4.
Touch the desired keyword.
The setting screen for the specified keyword appears.
5.
Make settings in the setting screen that appeared.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
The Main screen appears.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 39 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
40
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Selecting Voices
You can play the sounds of various instruments on the AT-80SL/60SL.
These sounds are called “Voices.”
■
About the Voices and Parts
The AT-80SL/60SL has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard.
From top to bottom these are called the “Upper Keyboard,” “Lower
Keyboard,” and “Pedalboard.”
fig.01-05
Three parts, “Organ,” “Symphonic,” and “Orchestral” are assigned to the
Upper and Lower keyboards, respectively, and you can select one voice
from each part. Plus, with the addition of the “Solo” part voice, you can have
up to three voices playing simultaneously (the Solo voice can be played in
either the Upper or Lower keyboard).
The Pedalboard has two parts: “Pedal Organ” and “Pedal Orchestral.” You
can select one voice for each part, meaning that it is possible to play up to
two voices simultaneously.
Keyboard Parts
Upper Keyboard
Upper Organ
Upper Symphonic
Upper Orchestral
Solo
(This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower]
button be extinguished)
Lower Keyboard
Lower Organ
Lower Symphonic
Lower Orchestral
Solo
(This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower]
button lights up)
Pedalboard Pedal Organ
Pedal Orchestral
Pedalboard
Lower Keyboard
Upper Keyboard
To play a Solo voice on the
Lower keyboard, select the
Solo voice and press the
Solo [To Lower] button (p.
137).
To play a Pedal Bass voice
on the Lower keyboard,
select the Pedal Bass voice
and press the [Bass Split]
b
utton (p. 140).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 40 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
41
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound
Select Buttons
AT-80SL
fig.01-06
Each time you press a voice button, its indicator will switch between being
lit and being turned off. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be
played.
Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button. Buttons
with voices from two different families have the names of both voices
printed on them.
The [Alternate] button switches between these two voices.
The [Alternate] button Voice that will be selected
The [Alternate] button is not lit. The voice indicated on the button is
selected.
The [Alternate] button is lit.
Another voice of the same family or
the voice indicated on the bottom half
of the button is selected.
TheaterPipe Pipe Pipe Theater
12
Jazz
1
Jazz
2
Jazz
3
123
Full Full Full
123
Synth
Strings
Slow
Strings
Strings
Chior
Horn
French
BrassPiano
Vibes
Marimba
Accordion
Harmonica
A.Guitar
E.Piano
E.Guitar
Mandolin
Banjo
Harp
Harpsi
Level Level Level
Alternate Alternate Alternate
Orchestral
Rotary Sound
Upper
Symphonic
Organ
Lower
1
Lower
2
Lower
3
Theater Theater
12
Pipe Pipe Pipe
123
Full
3
Full
2
Full
1
French
Horn
Strings BrassPiano
Harp
Harpsi
A.Guitar
Accordion
Harmonica
E.Piano
Vibes
Marimba
Orchestral
Level Level Level
Alternate Alternate Alternate
Rotary Sound
Lower
Symphonic
Organ
Theater
Organ
1
Organ
2
Octave
Up
Pipe Electric Bass &
Cymbal
Octave
Up
String
Contrabass
OrchestralOrgan
Pedal
Lower
To
Bass
Split
Chior
NOTE
No sounds are produced,
even when the keys are
played, when the Voice
b
utton is unlit and all
footage voices are off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 41 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
42
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices
Press the “Organ,” “Symphonic,” or “Orchestral” buttons for each
Keyboard (Upper/Lower) to select the desired voice.
When the power is turned on, the Upper keyboard will play “Full Organ1”
and the Lower keyboard will play “Lower Organ1.”
Example: Selecting “Full Organ 5” for the Upper Organ,
“Strings 5” for the Upper Symphonic, and Upper
Orchestral “Grand Piano” for the Upper Orchestral.
1.
Press the Upper Organ [Full 2] button (indicator lights).
The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.
fig.01-08
Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the “Full Organ 2” will sound.
2.
Press the Upper Organ [Alternate] button (the indicator
lights).
When you play the Upper keyboard, the “Full Organ 5” will sound.
Each time you press the [Alternate] button you will switch between the two
voices which are assigned the button.
3.
Press the Upper Symphonic [Strings] button (the indicator
lights).
Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the two voices “Full Organ 5” and
“Strings 5” will sound simultaneously (mixed together).
4.
Press the Upper Orchestral [Piano] button (the indicator
lights).
When you play the Upper keyboard, “Grand Piano” will be added,
producing a mixture of three different voices.
The lower voice can be
selected in the same way as
the upper voice.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 42 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
43
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Selecting Pedal Bass Voice
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Pedal Bass voice will sound
single notes using the “Organ Bass1” voice.
Press the buttons of the various parts of “Pedal Organ” and “Pedal
Orchestral” to select voices.
AT-80SL
fig.01-09
Example: Select “Pipe Org. Bs” for the Pedal Organ part,
and select “String Bass” for the Pedal Orchestral
part
1.
Press the Pedal Organ [Pipe] button (indicator lights).
The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.
fig.01-10
Now when you play the Pedalboard, “Pipe Org. Bs” (Pipe Organ Bass) will
be heard.
2.
Press the Pedal Orchestral [String] button (indicator lights).
Now when you play the Pedalboard, the two voices Pipe Organ Bass and
String Bass will sound simultaneously (mixed together).
Theater
Organ
1
Organ
2
Octave
Up
Pipe Electric Bass &
Cymbal
Octave
Up
String
Contrabass
OrchestralOrgan
Pedal
Lower
To
Bass
Split
12
Normally, playing the
pedalboard will sound one
note at a time. Settings can
b
e adjusted to allow
multiple notes to be played
on the Pedalboard (p. 185).
If you press the Pedal [To
Lower] button (indicator
lights → p. 142) or [Bass
Split] button (indicator
lights → p. 140), the Pedal
Bass voice can now be
played by the Lower
keyboard, not by the
Pedalboard.
AT-80SL have the [Octave
Up] button.
Play the Pedalboard once
more. Notice that when the
[Octave Up] button is on,
the selected Pedal Bass
voice will sound an octave
higher.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 43 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
44
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Selecting Solo Voice
The Solo section of the Upper keyboard is monophonic, that is, the Solo
voice will only sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard.
This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing
the highest (solo) note.
AT-80SL
fig.01-11
Example: Selecting “Trumpet” for the Solo part
1.
Press the Solo [Trumpet] button (indicator lights).
The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.
fig.01-12
Play the Upper keyboard. The selected voice will sound by the highest note
played.
When you press the [Alternate] button, the two voices assigned to the
button will alternate.
Sax
Violin Trumpet
Flute Oboe
Clarinet
Level
Alternate To Lower
Solo
1
By pressing the Solo [To
Lower] button, you can
play the Solo voice from
the Lower keyboard.
For details refer to
“Playing the Solo Voice
on the Lower Keyboard
(Solo [To Lower] Button)”
(p. 137).
It is possible to change how
a Solo voice will sound.
Normally, the Solo voice
will be sounded by the
highest note you play on
the Upper keyboard, but
you can make settings so
that the last-played note
will sound the Solo voice.
For details, refer to
“Changing How the Solo
Voice Responds” (p. 138).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 44 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
45
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button
Notice that there is an [Others] button for each part. By using the [Others]
button, you can select all voices.
As with the other voice buttons, the [Others] button can be assigned two
voices (one voice for “Pedal Organ” and one for “Pedal Orchestral”). You
can use the [Alternate] button to switch between these two voices.
1.
Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish
to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).
The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to
which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.
2.
Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to
specify a voice.
The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.
fig.01-15
3.
Touch a button that shows a sound group.
fig.01-15
Step 1 is unnecessary in the
case of Pedal Bass Part.
A voice indicated by
is called an “EX voice.”
These voices are especially
recommended.
NOTE
When you press the
[Others] button, the Others
Voice screen appears in the
display screen, but the
basic screen will reappear if
you wait several seconds
without touching the
screen.
If you want to change the
voice for the [Others]
button, press the [Others]
button once more, then
select the voice by quickly
touching the screen while
the Others Voice screen
appears in the display.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 45 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
46
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.
fig.01-16
4.
In the sub-window, touch a sound group name to select the
desired sound group.
The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.
The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the specified sound
group.
fig.01-17
5.
Touch < >< > to switch screens, and touch a voice
name to select a voice.
6.
Once again, press the blinking [Others] button to confirm
the voice.
The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.
You can touch <Active
Expression> in the Voice
Select screen to have only
the Active Expression
voices be displayed.
“Active Expression voices”
can be assigned to the
[Others] buttons of the
Upper Orchestral part,
Lower Orchestral part,
Pedal Orchestral part, and
Solo part.
For more on the active
expression voices, refer to
“Performing with an
Active Expression Voice”
(p. 49).
You can also confirm the
voice by touching <Exit> in
the Others Voice (Other
Voice select) screen. You
can also press the key for
the part containing a
changed voice to confirm
the voice setting.
For more information
about the voices that can be
assigned to an [Others]
b
utton, please refer to
“Voice List” (p. 220).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 46 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
47
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Performing with a Human Voice
In addition to sounds such as organ and piano, you can also play “human
voice,” which produces a vocal-like sound.
1.
Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish
to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).
The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to
which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.
2.
Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to
specify a voice.
The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.
fig.01-15
3.
Touch a button that shows a sound group.
fig.01-15
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.
fig.01-16
For more information
about the voices that can be
assigned to an [Others]
b
utton, please refer to
“Voice List” (p. 220).
NOTE
When you press the
[Others] button, the Others
Voice screen appears in the
display screen, but the
Main screen will reappear
if you wait several seconds
without touching the
screen.
If you want to change the
voice for the [Others]
button, press the [Others]
button once more, then
select the voice by quickly
touching the screen while
the Others Voice screen
appears in the display.
Step 1 is unnecessary in the
case of Pedal Bass Part.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 47 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
48
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
4.
In the sub-window, touch <Human Voice>.
The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.
The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the Human Voice
group.
The Others Voice screen will appear, and the sounds of the Human Voice
group will appear.
fig.01-
5.
Touch < >< > to switch the screen, and touch a voice
name to select the desired voice.
fig.01-
6.
Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose
sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.
The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.
You can also confirm the
voice by touching <Exit> in
the Others Voice (Other
Voice select) screen. You
can also press the key for
the part containing a
changed voice to confirm
the voice setting.
For some human voices,
such as “Jazz Scat,” the
sound will change
depending on the strength
at which you play the
keyboard. If the Utility
menu setting “Initial
Touch” (p. 185) is “OFF,”
the sound will not change
in response to the
dynamics of your keyboard
playing.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 48 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
49
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Performing with an Active Expression Voice
Some voices are “Active Expression voices,” for which advancing the
expression pedal will not only vary the volume, but will also add other
voices.
1.
Touch the [Others] button of the Part to which you want to
assign an Active Expression voice.
“Active Expression voices” can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the
Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo
part. The Others Voice screens appears.
2.
Touch a button that shows a sound group.
A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.
fig.01-17
3.
In the sub-window, touch <AEx Voice> (Active Expression
Voice).
The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.
The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Active
Expression Voices from the entire collection are displayed.
fig.01-17
4.
Touch < >< > to change screens, and touch a voice
name.
5.
Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose
sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.
The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.
An active expression voice will be selected.
You can also confirm the
voice by touching <Exit> in
the Others Voice (Other
Voice select) screen. You
can also press the key for
the part containing a
changed voice to confirm
the voice setting.
NOTE
Although you can select an
Active Expression voice
with the [Others] button for
parts other than Lower
Orchestral, Upper
Orchestral, Pedal
Orchestral, and Solo, no
Active Expression effect is
applied. The
(Active Expression) icon
does not appear when an
Active Expression voice is
selected for a part for
which the Active
Expression effect is not
being used.
Sounds marked by
“” support the
Active Expression function.
For details on the active
expression voices that are
available, refer to “Voice
list” (p. 220).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 49 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
50
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Creating Organ Sounds
(Footage) (AT-80SL)
You can touch <Digital H-Bar> in the Main screen of the AT-80S to display
the Footage screen. The sliders displayed in the screen are called “harmonic
bars.” The Footage Tablets that allow you to create a wide variety of organ
sounds by combining voices of different pitches.
Footage Screen
By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them, you can adjust the volume
of each footage.
The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0–8).
When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest.
When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.
Footage Voices of Differing Pitch (feet)
As the number decreases, the pitch will become correspondingly higher.
The Footage are organized as follows.
fig.01-23
You can touch < > to
switch between the Upper
Footage screen and Lower
Footage screen.
The Footage screen will be
displayed for several
seconds, then it will close
automatically.
If you touch <Hold>, the
screen continues to be
displayed until you touch
<Exit>. When you touch
the Footage screen and
then change the settings,
the screen is held in that
condition.
3
2´
´16´ 8´52´
2
4´
3
13
1
5
3
1´ ´ 1´1
root5th
1 octave 1 octave
5th
2 octave 2 octave
3rd
2 octave
5th
3 octave1 octave
below
8'
=
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 50 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
51
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
1.
Display the Main screen.
2.
Touch <Digital H-Bar> on the Main screen.
You can adjust the volume of individual footages by touching and sliding
(dragging) the harmonic bars.
Try layering combinations of pitches for the various footages.
3.
Touch the Percussion <4’> or <2 2/3’>.
Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added.
What is the Percussion?
These add a crisp sound with an attack to the Footage voices of the Upper
part.
4.
Touch Percussion <Fast Decay>.
The percussive sound will decay more quickly.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
The Main screen appears in the display, and the Digital H-Bar icon lights.
To switch the Footage off, touch <Digital H-Bar> in the Main screen; the icon
disappears.
Button Explanation
Percussion <4’>
Percussion one octave above
Percussion <2 2/3’>
Percussion one octave and a fifth above
<Fast Decay>
Shortens the decay time of the percussion
(short percussion)
NOTE
Pitch bend, glide, and
sustain effects are not
applied to the footage.
NOTE
Percussion <4’> and <2 2/
3’> cannot be used
simultaneously.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 51 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
52
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Adjust the Volume Balance
The AT-80SL/60SL allows you to adjust the volume balance individually for
each Part.
AT-80SL
fig.01-26
The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number
of Parts.
Button Part
Accomp/SMF [
▲
] [
▼
] button
Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
Playback of performance songs from
something other than the Atelier performance
songs (for example: SMF music files)
Rhythm [
▲
] [
▼
] button
(When the [Manual Perc]
button is ON)
Manual percussion
Rhythm [
▲
] [
▼
] button
(When the [Manual Perc]
button is OFF)
Rhythm performance
Drums/SFX
Pedal Organ [
▲
] [
▼
] button
Pedal Organ voice
Bass note of automatic accompaniment
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Lower
1
Lower
2
Lower
3
Theater Theater
12
Pipe Pipe Pipe
123
Full
3
Full
2
Full
1
French
Horn
Human
Voice
Strings BrassPiano
Harp
Harpsi
A.Guitar
Accordion
Harmonica
E.Piano
Vibes
Marimba
Orchestral
Level Level Level
Alternate Alternate Alternate
Rotary Sound
Lower
Symphonic
Organ
Reverb SMF Rhythm Organ
Pedal
Orch
Accomp /
TheaterPipe Pipe Pipe Theater
12
Jazz
1
Jazz
2
Jazz
3
123
Full Full Full
123
Synth
Strings
Slow
Strings
Voice
Strings
Horn
Human
French
Sax
Violin Trumpet
Flute Oboe
Clarinet
BrassPiano
Vibes
Marimba
Accordion
Harmonica
A.Guitar
E.Piano
E.Guitar
Mandolin
Banjo
Harp
Harpsi
Level Level Level Level
Alternate Alternate Alternate Alternate To Lower
Orchestral
Rotary Sound
Upper
Symphonic
Organ
Solo
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 52 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
53
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
1.
The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the
corresponding [
▲
] and [
▼
] buttons.
Pressing the upper button ([
▲
] button) will increase the volume.
Pressing the lower button ([
▼
] button) will decrease the volume.
The volume can be set to any value from 0 to 12.
When the volume value shown in the display is 0, that part will produce no
sound.
You can also press the [
▲
] button and [
▼
] button of the part whose volume
you wish to adjust, so that the “Part Balance Monitor screen” is displayed
for several seconds, allowing you to check the volume balance.
fig.01-27
You can check the volume by viewing the Level indicators of each part on
AT-80SL.
fig.01-27-2
The Part Balance Monitor
screen is displayed for
several seconds and then
closes automatically.
If you touch <Hold>, the
screen continues to be
displayed until you touch
<Exit>.
Sax
Violin Trumpet
Flute Oboe
Clarinet
Level
Alternate To Lower
Solo
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 53 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
54
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units
(Octave Shift)
The pitch of the sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one-octave
steps. This function is called “Octave Shift.” You can apply an Octave shift
to all Parts.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.01-29
2.
Touch either <UPPER>, <LOWER>, or <PEDAL>.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Octave Shift.
Menu Part whose pitch will change
UPPER
To change the pitch of the Upper and Solo part
LOWER
To change the pitch of the Lower part
PEDAL
To change the pitch of the Pedal part
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 54 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
55
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
4.
Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift
settings you wish to change.
fig.01-30.eps
5.
Touch < >< > to adjust the settings.
The value can be set to a range of +/- 3 octaves.
fig.01-30.eps
6.
Touch <Exit>.
You will return to the Upper Keyboard/Lower Keyboard/Pedalboard
screen.
You can open the
Pedalboard screen, Lower
Keyboard screen, or Upper
Keyboard screen with
touching <Pedal>,
<Lower>, and <Upper>.
When the power is turned
on, the Octave Shift setting
for each part of the Pedal
Bass will be set to -1 (1
octave down).
If you turn on the [Octave
Up] button on the AT-80SL,
the Octave Shift will be
automatically set to “0”
regardless of the previous
setting. When you turn off
the [Octave Up] button on
the AT-80SL, the Octave
Shift will always return to
“-1” regardless of the
previous setting.
NOTE
Please note that when you
apply the Octave Shift
function to certain voices,
their pitch could be
stretched beyond their
recommended note ranges,
and they may not sound as
expected. Care should be
taken when using Octave
Shift.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 55 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
56
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects
from the Entire Lower Keyboard
(Drums/SFX)
You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds (drum set).
In this case, the Lower voices will no longer sound.
fig.01-32
1.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light
up.
The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off
(dark) each time it is pressed.
The Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen will be displayed for several
seconds.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.01-33
2.
Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum
sounds on each key.
Refer to “Drum Set List” (p.
225) for details on which
drum sound or Sound
Effect will be played by
each note.
Manual
Perc
Drums /
SFX
Lower Lower
Manual
Perc
Drums
SFX
AT-60SLAT-80SL
NOTE
It is not possible to select
and play both [Drums/
SFX] and [Manual Perc]
buttons simultaneously.
NOTE
For some drum sets, there
will be keys that do not
sound.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 56 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
57
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Changing Drums/SFX Sets
Immediately after the power is turned on, the POP drum set will sound.
As the drum set, you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect.
When you change the drum set, the sound produced by each note will
change.
1.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light
up.
The Drums/SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.01-33
2.
While the Drums/SFX screen is displayed, touch a Drum/SFX
set name in the screen.
The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will begin to blink.
AT-80SL
You can select from 18 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as
follows:
POP, R&B, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, HIP HOP, VOX DRUM, STANDARD,
STANDARD2, ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808,
DANCE, JAZZ, BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS
AT-60SL
You can select from 16 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as
follows:
POP, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2,
ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ,
BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS
3.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button once again.
The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will be lit constantly, and the selected
Drum Set Type will be applied.
For the types of drum set
and the sound effects
played by each key, refer to
“Drum/SFX Set List” (p.
225).
You can also confirm the
Drums/SFX set by
touching <Exit> in the
Drums/SFX screen.
You can also play the lower
manual to confirm the
drum set.
NOTE
After the Drums/SFX
(drums/sound effects)
screen is displayed, it will
close automatically after
several seconds unless you
touch the screen to select a
drums/sound effects set. If
you wish to switch drums/
sound effect sets, quickly
select the desired drums/
sound effect set while the
Drums/SFX (drums/
sound effects) screen is
displayed.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 57 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
58
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion
Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase
(Manual Percussion)
You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15
keys of the Lower keyboard. This is convenient when you wish to play the
Lower voice together with drum sounds or Sound Effects.
fig.01-34
fig.01-35
fig.01-35-2
1.
Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights).
The button will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (dark) each time it is
pressed.
The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.01-36
2.
When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard
the chosen drum sound is played on each key.
Manual
Perc
Drums /
SFX
Lower Lower
Manual
Perc
Drums
SFX
AT-60SLAT-80SL
the keys for Drum sounds
or Sound Effects
Lower Keyboard
NOTE
It is not possible to select
and play both [Drums/
SFX] and [Manual Perc]
b
uttons simultaneously. (p.
56).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 58 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
59
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
■
Changing the Manual Percussion Sets
Immediately after the power is turned on, the PERC SET1 drum set will
sound.
You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set. When you change the
Manual Percussion Set, the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of
the Lower keyboard will change.
1.
Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights).
The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.01-36
2.
While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed, touch a
manual percussion set name in the screen.
The [Manual Perc] button indicator will begin to flash.
AT-80SL
You can select from 14 different Manual Percussion Sets;
PERC SET1, PERC SET2, PERC SET3, ORCHESTRA SET,
ORCHESTRA SET2, LATIN SET, ASIAN SET, VOICE PHRASE,
VOICE PHRASE 2, VOICE PHRASE 3, SFX SET, SFX SET 2,
JAPANESE SET, JAPANESE SET 2
AT-60SL
You can select from 7 different Manual Percussion Sets;
PERC SET1, PERC SET2, LATIN SET, VOICE PHRASE,
VOICE PHRASE2, SFX SET, JAPANESE SET
3.
Press the [Manual Perc] button once again.
The [Manual Perc] button indicator will be lit constantly, and the selected
Manual Percussion Set will be applied.
Refer to “Drum Set List” (p.
225) for details on which
percussion sound will be
played by each note.
NOTE
The Manual Percussion
screen will automatically
close after several seconds
if you do not touch the
screen to select a manual
percussion set. If you wish
to change the manual
percussion set, you must
select a manual percussion
set quickly while the
manual percussion screen
is displayed.
You can also confirm the
Manual Percussion set by
touching <Exit> in the
Manual Percussion screen.
You can also play the lower
manual to confirm the
manual percussion set.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 59 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
60
Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds
Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part
(Lower Hold)
You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers
from the keys, until the next key is played.
fig.02-14
1.
Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button (confirm that the
indicator is lit).
The Lower voice will continue sounding.
While the Lower Voice [Hold] button is lit, pressing a key will cause the note
to continue sounding.
2.
When you press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to make the
indicator go dark, the notes which had continued to sound
will stop.
Hold
Voice
Lower
Hold
Lower
Voice
AT-60SLAT-80SL
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 60 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
61
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
The AT-80SL/60SL lets you enjoy playing along with a rhythmic
accompaniment.
Selecting a Rhythm
The AT-80SL/60SL provides various Rhythms and Automatic
Accompaniments (Music Styles).
These are organized into 10 groups.
fig.02-01
1.
Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group.
The indicator will light.
A Rhythm screen like the following appears.
fig.02-09_55
The rhythms in the selected rhythm group appears in the display.
2.
Touch < >< > to switch screens, and touch a rhythm
name to select the desired rhythm.
The indicator of Rhythm button will blink.
3.
Press the Rhythm button once again (indicator lights
constantly).
The Rhythm button’s indicator will change from blinking to light.
The Rhythm has now been applied.
For more on the internal
rhythms, refer to the
“Rhythm List” (p. 242, p.
244).
WorldBallad
March
Showtime
Swing
Latin
Acoustic
BigBand
Gospel
Contempo
Country Oldies
Waltz Trad
Rhythm
AT-60SLAT-80SL
Rhythm
World
Latin
Ballad
ShowtimeMarch Acoustic
Waltz Tr a d
Swing
Big Band
Gospel
Country
Contempo
Oldies
You can also open the
Rhythm screen by touching
<Rhythm> in the Main
screen.
You can also confirm the
rhythm by touching <Exit>
in the Rhythm screen.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 61 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
62
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
■
Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory
The AT-80SL/60SL features a User memory.
The AT-80SL/60SL is shipped from the factory with rhythms already stored
in User memory. You can replace these rhythms with rhythms loaded in
from Music Style Disks, or with User rhythms you’ve created and saved
using the Rhythm Customize function (p. 173).
The content of User memory is retained even while the AT-80SL/60SL’s
power is turned off.
You can call up rhythms in User memory by pressing the [Disk/User]
button.
Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory
1.
Press the [Disk/User] button.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > on the Rhythm screen.
The rhythms stored in User Memory are displayed.
3.
Touch < >< > to switch screens, and touch a rhythm
name to select the desired rhythm.
The indicator of [Disk/User] button will blink.
4.
After selecting a rhythm, press the flashing [Disk/User]
button once more.
The [Disk/User] button stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the
rhythm has been selected.
If you wish to store a disk
Rhythm in the User
memory, refer to “Copying
Rhythms on Disks into
User Memory” (p. 78).
What is the User Memory?
The User memory is the area within the instrument where User rhythms
you create as well as rhythms from Music Style Disks are stored.
You can also copy User rhythms saved on floppy disks to the User
memory (p. 173).
If you want to restore the
original rhythms that User
memory contained at the
time the instrument was
shipped from the factory,
refer to “Restoring the
Rhythm Stored in the
User Memory to Their
Original Factory
Settings” (p. 80).
If a floppy disk containing
saved rhythms is in the
disk drive, then when you
touch < >, the
rhythms on the floppy disk
are displayed.
You can also confirm the
rhythm by touching <Exit>
in the Rhythm screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 62 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
63
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
■
Rhythm Search
You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song, musical genre,
or other criteria you set.
You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08
The following Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > on the Main screen.
A sub-window appears.
You can also search only
for rhythms other than the
internal rhythms accessed
with the [Disk/User]
b
utton. The icon does
not appear in the display
while [Disk/User] button
rhythms are displayed.
If some other screen is
displayed, touch <Exit> to
close the currently open
screen.
You can also open the
Rhythm screen by pressing
Rhythm buttons.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 63 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
64
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Searching by Rhythm name
3.
Touch <By Name>.
4.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”
→
“B”
→
“C”...).
Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The search results appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
6.
Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Rhythm screen.
Searching by Conditions
3.
Touch <By Conditions>.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Tempo,” “Beat,” “Groove,”
and “Genre.”
4.
Touch the value for the search term.
5.
Touch < >< > to adjust the settings.
6.
Touch <Start> (Start Search).
The search results appear in the display.
To cancel the search, touch <Exit> in the Search Results screen.
7.
Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Rhythm screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 64 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
65
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Playing Rhythm
There are two ways to start the Rhythm:
• Manually by pressing the [Start] button,
• Automatically by playing a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard
(Sync Start).
You can press (Sync Start) or the [Intro/Ending] button to start the rhythm
from the intro, or stop the rhythm at the ending.
fig.02-03
■
Starting at the Press of a Button
Starting with an Added Intro
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light,
until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.
Making the Intro Short and Simple
1.
Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button.
[Start/Stop] button indicator will blink.
The indicator for the [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.
2.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
Starting Without an Intro
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.
The functions of the [Intro/
Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button can be
assigned to the foot
switches located on each
side of the Expression
Pedal (p. 118).
Break
Sync
Start
Stop
Start/
Intro/
Ending
Count
Down Sync
Start
Stop
Start/
Intro/
Ending
Count
Down
AT-60SLAT-80SL
For more on the [To
Variation] and [To
Original] buttons, refer to
“Adding Variety to the
Rhythm or Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 69).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 65 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
66
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
■
Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You
Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard
(Sync Start)
Starting with an Added Intro
1.
Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
2.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The [Intro/Ending] button’s indicator will blink.
3.
Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.
The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light,
until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.
Making the Intro Short and Simple
1.
Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
2.
Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button.
[Start/Stop] button indicator will blink.
The indicator for the [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.
3.
Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.
A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.
Starting Without an Intro
1.
Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
2.
Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard.
The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.
NOTE
If the Arranger function is
ON (the Arranger [On/Off]
b
utton indicator is lit), it is
not be able to start the
Rhythm by playing the
Pedalboard (p. 68).
For more on the [To
Variation] and [To
Original] buttons, refer to
“Adding Variety to the
Rhythm or Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 69).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 66 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
67
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
■
Stopping the Rhythm
Stopping with an Ending
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.
While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light,
until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.
Making the Ending Short and Simple
1.
Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button, and then
press the [Start/Stop] button.
A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.
Stopping without an Ending
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.
Changing a Rhythm’s Tempo
You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p.
68).
fig.02-04
1.
Press the Tempo [ ] and [ ] buttons to change the tempo
(speed) of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment.
By pressing the Tempo [ ] and[ ] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is
returned to the standard (preset) tempo for the selected Rhythm.
The value of the tempo currently set (20–500 beats per minute) can be
checked in the Main screen and Rhythm screen.
Tempo [ ] button The tempo becomes slower
Tempo [ ] button The tempo becomes faster
The functions of the [Intro/
Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button can be
assigned to the foot
switches located on each
side of the Expression
Pedal (p. 118).
If you switch rhythms
when “Auto Std Tempo”
(p. 189) is on, the tempo
changes to match the
rhythm. If you switch
rhythms when “Auto Std
Tempo” is off, the tempo
remains unchanged even
when you switch the
rhythm.
Tempo
Standard
You can confirm the tempo
and beat with the
“bouncing ball” in the
Main screen (p. 26).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 67 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
68
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro
If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a countdown
played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you
are to start playing.
fig.02-05
1.
Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.
2.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro.
When the [Sync Start] button is lit, specifying the chord on the Lower
keyboard starts the intro, and again, a countdown is given.
3.
To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button,
turning off the indicator light.
Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
The Arranger function of the AT-80SL/60SL can add an Automatic
Accompaniment to each Rhythm. Based on the selected Rhythm, the
Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for
the chord being pressed on the Lower keyboard.
fig.02-06
1.
Press the Arranger [On/Off] button (indicator lights.)
2.
Start the rhythm (p. 65).
The rhythm and the automatic accompaniment will play together.
If the Arranger [On/Off] button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected,
the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound.
Arranger [On/Off] button Function
Indicator is lit (On) Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
Indicator is not lit (Off) Rhythm (Drums only)
Break
Sync
Start
Stop
Start/
Intro/
Ending
Count
Down Sync
Start
Stop
Start/
Intro/
Ending
Count
Down
AT-60SLAT-80SL
You can change the
countdown sound (p. 189).
Arranger
On / Off
NOTE
When the Arranger [On/
Off] button is on, Sync Start
(p. 66) on the pedalboard
cannot be used.
NOTE
The lower voice is not
played during the
performance of the intro
and ending, even when the
Lower keyboard is played.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 68 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
69
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Adding Variety to the Rhythm or
Automatic Accompaniment
You can add variety to the rhythm or automatic accompaniment by
changing the rhythm pattern of the rhythm or the arrangement of the
automatic accompaniment, or by inserting a break (i.e., stopping the rhythm
for one measure).
fig.02-07
■
Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and
Accompaniment (Style Orchestrator)
You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. This function is
called “Style Orchestrator.” For each rhythm, there are four types of
arrangement for the accompaniment.
The following buttons are called Style Orchestrator buttons.
fig.02-08
1.
Press the Style Orchestrator buttons to change the
arrangement of the accompaniment.
The indicator of the button you pressed will light.
The [Basic] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the [Full] button
produces the most florid.
Button name Function
Fill In [To Variation] button After the Fill-In has played, play the
Variation Rhythm pattern.
Fill In [To Original] button After the Fill-In has played, play the
Original Rhythm pattern.
[Break] button
<AT-80SL only>
Stop the rhythm at the end of that
measure (Break).
Break
To
Variation To
Original Intro/
Ending
Count
Down
Fill In
To
Variation To
Original
Fill In
AT-60SLAT-80SL NOTE
AT-60SL has no [Break]
b
utton.
What’s a fill-in?
A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a
point where the character of the song changes (between Chorus’s or Verses).
The functions of the Fill In
[To Variation] button and
Fill In [To Original] button
can be assigned to the foot
switches located on each
side of the Expression
Pedal. Please refer to
“Changing the Function
of the Foot Switch” (p.
118).
FullBasic Advanced
1
Advanced
2
Style Orchestrator
AT-60SLAT-80SL
Style Orchestrator
Full
12
Advanced
Basic
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 69 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
70
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently plays the correct
accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on
the Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment.
For example, in order to make the instrument detect a “C Major” chord, you
must normally play the three keys “C,” “E,” and “G.” If you use the Chord
Intelligence function, you can simply press a single “C” key in the lower
keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower
part.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09_55
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-10_55
For more information
about chord fingering, refer
to the “Chord List” (p.
247).
You can also open the
rhythm screen by pressing
a Rhythm button.
If you press the root note of
the chord (p. 249) in the
lower keyboard when the
Chord Intelligence function
is off, all notes in that chord
will sound.
For example, if you press
the root “C” of the C major
chord in the lower
keyboard, the notes of the
C major chord “C,” “E,”
and “G” will be sounded
by the voice selected for the
lower part.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 70 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
71
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
fig.02-11_55
4.
Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it “ON.”
The Chord Intelligence function can now be used.
Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting, it will be switched ON/
OFF.
5.
If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function,
switch it “OFF.”
When the Leading Bass
function (p. 72) is on and
the Chord Intelligence
function is off, you can
specify chords with a
combination of the lower
keyboard and pedalboard.
When you touch the [One
Touch Program] button, the
Chord Intelligence setting
will automatically be
turned ON.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 71 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
72
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Leading Bass Function
When Automatic Accompaniment is used, and the Pedal [To Lower] button
is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note (p. 249) of the
chord you play on the Lower keyboard.
If the Leading Bass function is enabled, the lowest note of the chord you play
on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note (the bottom note
of the chord). This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the
chord you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are
played (p. 249).
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09_55
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-10_55
When the Leading Bass
function is on and the
Chord Intelligence function
(p. 70) is off, you can
specify chords with a
combination of the lower
keyboard and pedalboard.
You can also open the
Rhythm screen by pressing
the Rhythm buttons.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 72 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
73
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
fig.02-11_55
4.
Touch the Leading Bass setting to turn it “ON.”
Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.
5.
To turn off the Leading Bass function, set the Leading Bass
setting to “OFF.”
You can assign the Leading
Bass functions to either of
the foot switches located on
each side of the Expression
Pedal. Please refer to
“Changing the Function
of the Foot Switch” (p.
118).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 73 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
74
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
A Simple Way to Make Automatic
Accompaniment Settings
(One Touch Program)
The AT-80SL/60SL provides a very convenient [One Touch Program]
button. By simply pressing this button once, the Arranger function will be
turned ON, and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with
the currently selected Rhythm/Automatic Accompaniment are selected.
By pressing the [One Touch Program] button, you can make the following
settings.
• Panel settings (e.g., sounds and volume) suitable for the rhythm
• Arranger [On/Off] button lit (Automatic Accompaniment playing)
• [Sync Start] button lit, [Intro/Ending] button blinking (Waiting for Sync
Start)
• Chord Intelligence function is ON (p. 70)
The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as
follows.
16 panel settings for each rhythm (4 panel settings x 4 groups)
What is Sync Start?
Sync Start is a function that starts the rhythm at the moment that you play
the lower keyboard.
What is Chord Intelligence?
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently decides on
accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord
during automatic accompaniment.
1234
1234
1234
1234
1 Group
2 Group
3 Group
4 Group
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 74 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
75
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
1.
Select a Rhythm (p. 61).
2.
Press the [One Touch Program] button.
The [One Touch Program] button’s indicator will light.
fig.02-15
An One Touch Program Group (One Touch Program Group select) screen
like the one shown below will be displayed for several seconds.
f
3.
While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed,
touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group.
If you fail to select a One Touch Program group while the One Touch
Program Group screen is displayed, “Group 1” will be selected
automatically.
Panel settings appropriate for the rhythm and automatic accompaniment
will automatically be called up for Registration [1]–[4] buttons.
4.
Press the Registration [1] – [4] button to select panel settings.
5.
On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.
At the moment you play the lower keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then
the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.
6.
Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the
Rhythm.
Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops.
7.
Press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its
indicator.
You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the
[One Touch Program] button.
Set
Program
One Touch
To redisplay the One Touch
Program Group screen,
while holding down the
Registration [Write] button,
press the [One Touch
Program] button.
Touch the One Touch
Program Group screen to
reselect the group.
When you press the [One
Touch Program] button, the
“Arranger Update” setting
will automatically change
to “INSTANT” (p. 92).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 75 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
76
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Using a Rhythm from a Disk
The AT-80SL/60SL contains built-in Rhythms (Music Styles). Additional
Rhythms (Music Styles) are available on the Music Style disk included are
available. Here’s how to select a Rhythm (Music Style) from a Music Style
disk.
■
Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk
1.
Hold the floppy disk face up, and push it into the disk drive
until it clicks into place.
The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the keyboard.
fig.02-18
2.
Press the Eject button.
The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Gently grasp the end of the
floppy disk and pull it out.
fig.02-19
NOTE
All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use of
commercially available
Music Style disk for
purposes other than
private, personal
enjoyment is a violation of
applicable laws.
NOTE
If you’re using the disk
drive for the first time, be
sure to read the important
notes on p. 6.
Eject buttonIndicator
Floppy Disk
NOTE
Never eject a disk while
reading or writing is in
progress, since that can
damage the magnetic
surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable. (The
disk drive’s indicator will
light up at full brightness
when the drive is busy
reading or writing data.
Ordinarily, the indicator
will be less brightly lit, or
b
e extinguished.)
Eject Button
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 76 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
77
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
■
Reviewing the Styles on a Music Style Disk
1.
Press the Rhythm [Disk/User] button (confirm that its
indicator is lit).
The Rhythm screen appears.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.02-20_55
2.
Insert the Music Style disk into the disk drive.
The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the music style disk.
Rhythms from the music style disk are indicated by an “ ” icon.
fig.02-21_55
3.
Touch < >, causing it to light up; the rhythms on the
music style disk are displayed.
4.
Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm on the Music
Style disk.
The [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being
loaded into internal memory.
When loading is finished, you will be able to play the selected rhythm.
5.
Press the [Start/Stop] button or the [Intro/Ending] button.
The selected Rhythm is played.
When < > is lit,
the rhythms stored in User
memory are displayed.
If rhythms from a music
style disk are stored in
internal memory, you can
recall the Rhythms simply
b
y pressing the [Disk/
User] button (p. 78).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 77 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
78
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Copying Rhythms on Disks into User
Memory
While the AT-80SL/60SL comes with rhythms already loaded in its User
memory (p. 62), you can replace these with Music Style Disk rhythms.
Rhythms loaded from the disk into internal memory will not be lost even if
the power is turned off. It is convenient to load frequently-used disk
Rhythms into internal memory.
1.
Insert the Music Style disk into the disk drive.
2.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-21_55
3.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-22_55
4.
Touch <Copy to User>.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 78 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
79
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
The Copy To User screen appears.
fig.02-23_55
5.
Touch < >< > to select the Music Style Disk rhythm
you want to copy to the User memory.
Rhythm [Disk/User] button indicator will blink.
6.
After selecting the Music Style Disk Rhythm, touch <Next>.
The following screen appears.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.02-24_55
Touch <Back> to go back to the previous screen.
7.
Touch the screen to switch screens, and touch the save-
destination rhythm.
The following screen appears.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.02-25_55
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
At this time, you can press
<> or the [Start/
Stop] button to play the
rhythm to make sure of
your choice.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 79 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
80
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
8.
To store the Rhythm in internal memory, touch <OK>.
The saving of the rhythm to internal memory begins.
Once the Rhythm has been accommodated in memory, the Rhythm screen
will reappear.
Restoring the Rhythm Stored in the
User Memory to Their Original Factory
Settings
Use the following procedure to restore only the rhythm stored in the User
Memory to their factory settings.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
fig.02-22_55
3.
Touch <Reset User> on the Sub-window.
The confirmation message appears on the screen.
4.
Touch <OK>.
The Rhythm that had been stored in the User Memory button will return to
the factory settings.
NOTE
Never remove the disk or
turn off the power while
the Rhythm data is being
loaded from disk into the
AT-80SL/60SL. If you do
so, the Rhythm data will
not be loaded into the AT-
80SL/60SL, and
malfunctions could
result. After returning the
Rhythm stored in the
[Disk/User] button to the
factory settings (see
following section), re-
load the Rhythm from
disk.
To restore all of the factory
settings, use the Factory
Reset operation (p. 23).
You can restore the User
Memory to the factory
settings in the screen.
1. Press the [Power On]
button to turn off the
power.
2. Hold down the Rhythm
[Disk/User] button, and
press the [Power On]
button.
Never turn off the
power while the
following screen is
displayed.
fig.02-27_70
The Rhythm that had
been stored in the User
Memory will return to
the factory settings.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 80 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
81
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Copying Rhythms Saved in User
Memory to Floppy Disks
You can take rhythms saved in User memory (p. 62) and copy them to
floppy disks.
1.
Make sure that the disk drive contains a disk that was
formatted (p. 96) by the ATELIER.
2.
Press the Rhythm [Disk/User] button.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09_55
3.
Touch < >.
4.
Touch the Rhythm name to select the rhythm you want to
copy to the floppy disk.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
When < > is lit,
the rhythms stored on the
floppy disk are displayed.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 81 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
82
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
5.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-22_55
6.
Touch <Copy to Disk> on the Rhythm screen.
The Copy to Disk screen appears.
7.
Touch < >< > to select the copy-destination number.
Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be
displayed as “- - - - -.”
To cancel the copy, touch the <Exit> button to close the Copy to Disk screen.
8.
Touch <OK> to copy the rhythm to the floppy disk.
Copying of the rhythm to the floppy disk begins.
When the rhythm is saved, the Rhythm screen returns to the display.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 82 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
83
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Changing the Order of the Rhythms
Stored in User Memory
You can rearrange the order of the rhythms stored in User memory (p. 62).
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
fig.02-09_55
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-22_55
3.
Touch <Edit User>.
The Edit User screen appears.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 83 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
84
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
4.
Touch < >< > in the screen to select a rhythm.
5.
Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the rhythm.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Button Meaning Description
Rename
Modify the name
The Rename screen appears. You can
touch the screen and rename the
selected rhythm (p. 85).
Up
Change the order
(upward)
The selected rhythm will be moved
earlier in the order.
Down
Change the order
(downward)
The selected rhythm will be moved
later in the order.
Delete
Delete the Rhythm The selected rhythm will be deleted
(p. 87).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 84 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
85
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Changing the Names of Rhythms
Stored in User Memory
You can rename rhythms stored in User memory (p. 62).
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-22_55
3.
Touch <Edit User>.
The Edit User screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to select the rhythm whose name you
want to change.
5.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 85 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
86
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
6.
Touch < > to change among uppercase/
lowercase/symbols.
Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available
choice, like this: uppercase
→
lowercase
→
symbols
→
uppercase ....
7.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
8.
When you’re done making the settings, touch <OK>.
The Rhythm has now been named. The Edit User screen reappears.
9.
Touch <Exit>.
Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols ! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Delete a character.
Insert a space.
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at
which characters will be input) to left or right.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 86 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
87
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
Deleting Rhythms Stored in User
Memory
You can delete rhythms stored in User memory (p. 62).
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.02-22_55
3.
Touch <Edit User>.
The Edit User screen appears.
4.
In the screen, touch < >< > to select the rhythm that
you wish to delete.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 87 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
88
Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance
5.
Touch <Delete>.
The following display appears.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
6.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the rhythm, touch
<OK>.
When a rhythm is deleted, the deleted rhythm name will change to “- - - - -. ”
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 88 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
89
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
The AT-80SL/60SL allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in
the Registration buttons. The AT-80SL has a total of twelve registration
buttons (the AT-60SL has eight), and one set of panel settings can be
registered to each button, for a total of twelve types (eight types on the AT-
60SL) of panel settings. Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a
Registration button is called a “Registration.”
This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings
during a performance, or to recall a complex panel setting.
AT-80SL
fig.03-01
f
AT-60SL
ig.03-02
About the Registration Buttons
In addition to assigning voices and rhythms to the Registration buttons, you
can also store the following settings:
•Panel button settings (for example, settings for the Level [
▲
] [
▼
]buttons
and Solo [To Lower] button)
• Controller settings (functions assigned to foot switches, pitch bend
range, etc.)
• Other types of settings (reverb type, tempo settings, degree of initial
touch, etc.)
If you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the
Registration buttons, refer to
“Settings That Are Stored After the Power
Is Turned Off”
(p. 255).
Furthermore, you can group the settings assigned to the Registration
buttons as a single set, and then register and save up to a maximum of 99
sets onto a single floppy disk (p. 98).
In addition to the settings recorded to the Registration buttons, the
following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved to floppy
disks.
• Registration Name
→
p. 94
• Registration Shift
→
p. 119
• Arranger Update
→
p. 92
• Trans. Update (Transpose Update)
→
p. 190
• Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
→
p. 121
Settings that have been
stored to Registration
b
uttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-
60SL, Registration buttons
[1]–[8]) are remembered
even if the power is turned
off. If you wish to restore
the settings stored in the
Registration buttons to
their factory settings, use
the “Factory Reset”
operation (p. 23).
6
Write Load
Next
234 5 78 91011121
Manual
6
Write Load
Next
234 5 781
Manual
Recorded performance data
and rhythms from User
memory are not stored in
Registration sets.
When a rhythm saved in
User memory is assigned to
a Registration set, that
rhythm is copied
beforehand to the User
memory.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 89 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
90
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Procedure for Creating Registration Sets
You can change voice and other panel settings by pressing the Registration
buttons during performance of songs.
Prepare the Registrations
A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be
pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the
Registration [1] button, continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance
with the progression of the song.
Save the Registrations to the floppy disk
If you want to use more than eight Registrations in a song, save the settings
for Registration buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–
[8]) to a floppy disk as a set, then continue to store further panel settings
again, starting from Registration button [1]. Save all of the Registration sets
you have set to the floppy disk.
Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used
Save the Registration sets to the floppy disk in the order they are to be used
in the song. You can use the Disk Edit function (p. 110) to alter the sequence
and names of rhythms contained on the floppy disk (p. 94) as well as delete
such rhythms (p. 108).
Using Registration Sets
Call up the Registration sets saved on the floppy disk to the AT-80SL/
60SL
Insert the floppy disk containing the saved Registration sets into the disk
drive, and read the Registration sets into the AT-80SL/60SL.
Switch the Registration sets as you perform
Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song.
To call up the next Registration Set, press the [Load Next] button, then press
the Registration buttons.
Storing Registrations
fig.03-02
1.
Make all the panel settings that you wish to store.
2.
While holding down the [Write] button, press one of the
Registration buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration
buttons [1]–[8]).
The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button.
You can also assign the
“Right + Load Next” to the
foot switch and use it to
call up subsequent
Registration sets (p. 119).
Write
23 5641
Manual
For details on the settings
that are stored in a
Registration, refer to
“Settings That Are Stored
After the Power Is Turned
Off” (p. 255).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 90 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
91
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Recalling a Registration
Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons [1]–[12] (on the
AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]) can be recalled in two ways:
“INSTANT” and “DELAYED.”
At the factory this is set to “DELAYED.”
■
How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED)
Recalling voices and other panel settings
1.
Press and immediately release one of the Registration
buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–
[8]).
Recalling settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment in
addition to the panel settings
1.
Press and hold a Registration button [1]–[12] (on the AT-
60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]) for several seconds.
The indicator of the rhythm select button will blink, and the panel settings
and settings related to rhythm performance and automatic accompaniment
will be recalled.
■
How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT)
Recalling panel settings of a voice, or when recalling settings for
rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment in addition
to panel settings
1.
Press and immediately release one of the Registration
buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–
[8]).
When changing the way
Registrations are called up,
refer to “Changing the
Timing of Recalling
Registrations” (p. 92).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 91 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
92
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
■
Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations
Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when
you continue holding a Registration button [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL,
Registration buttons [1]–[8]) for several seconds, but you can change this so
that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
2.
Touch <Load>.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05_55
3.
Touch <Utility>.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.03-06_55
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by
pressing the [Registration]
button on the panel.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 92 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
93
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch <Options>.
The Registration Options screen appears.
fig.03-07_55
5.
Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between
“DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between
“DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Automatically Registering When You
Switch Panel Settings
When the [Manual] button is ON (lit), all panel settings you make will be
stored automatically in the [Manual] button as they are made, thus updating
the Registration that had been previously saved.
fig.03-08
Setting Descriptions
DELAYED
When you press and hold a Registration button for several
seconds, the settings for Rhythm and Automatic
Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel
settings.
If you press and immediately release a Registration
button, only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or
Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.
INSTANT
Settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will
be recalled the instant that you press a Registration button
[1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]).
You can change the timing
of recalling the transpose
setting when you press a
Registration button.
For details refer to
“Changing the Timing at
Which Transposition
Settings are Recalled” (p.
190).
Write
23 5641
Manual
NOTE
The settings stored in the
[Manual] button will return
to their default values
when the power is turned
off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 93 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
94
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Assigning a Name to a Registration Set
When saving Registration sets, names like “REGIST-01–99” will be assigned
by default, but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the
contents of the Registration set.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
2.
Touch <Save>.
The Registration Save screen appears.
fig.03-09_55
3.
Touch <Utility> to open the Utility screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.03-10_55
When you touch <go to
Load>, the instrument
jumps to the Registration
Load screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 94 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
95
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
fig.03-11_55
5.
Touch < > to change among uppercase/
lowercase/symbols.
Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available
choice, like this: uppercase
→
lowercase
→
symbols
→
uppercase ....
6.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch <OK>.
The Registration set in the AT-80SL/60SL’s internal memory has now been
named.
fig.03-12_55
Uppercase A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols ! “ # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Delete a character.
Insert a space.
Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at
which characters will be input) to left or right.
The Rename screen can
also be opened in the
following ways.
Main screen
<Registration>→ <Load>→
Registration Load screen
<Utility>→ Utility screen
<Rename>
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 95 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
96
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Formatting Disks
Before any floppy disk (new or used) can be used with the AT-80SL/60SL it
must first be formatted (prepared).
Formatting a floppy disk erases all information stored on the disk, and puts
it in a format that is acceptable for the device in which it will be used. If a
floppy disk is in a format that doesn’t match the format of this unit, you
won’t be able to use that floppy disk.
1.
Make sure that the write protect tab of the floppy disk is in
the “Write” (permit) position.
fig.07-17
2.
With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the disk drive until it clicks into position.
The disk drive is located to the upper right of the AT-80SL/60SL’s keyboard.
fig.07-17
3.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
NOTE
Formatting a disk destroys
all data previously stored
on the disk. If you’re
formatting a used floppy
disk for reuse, be sure to
check first to make sure the
disk doesn’t contain any
data you don’t want to lose.
Rear side of the disk
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
Write Protect Tab
Eject buttonIndicator
Floppy Disk
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 96 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
97
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch <Save>.
The Registration Save screen appears.
fig.03-09_55
5.
Touch <Utility>.
The Utility screen appears.
6.
Touch <Format Disk>.
The Format Disk screen appears.
fig.
If you touch <Cancel>, you will return to the Registration Save screen
without formatting.
7.
Touch <OK> to start formatting.
While formatting is in progress, the following display appears.
fig.
When the format is finished, the Registration Save screen returns.
NOTE
Never attempt to remove
the floppy disk until
formatting is complete.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 97 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
98
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Saving Registration Sets to a Floppy
Disk
With the settings of Registration buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL,
Registration buttons [1]–[8]) considered as one set, a single floppy disk can
store up to 99 sets of data. We recommend that complex panel settings or
Registrations you wish to keep be saved on disk. Furthermore, when you
save registrations created on the AT-80SL/60SL to floppy disks, you can call
up their settings on other Atelier Series instruments and use the
registrations the same way.
1.
Make sure that the disk drive contains a disk that was
formatted (p. 96) by the AT-80SL/60SL.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
3.
Touch <Save>.
The Registration Save screen appears.
fig.03-09_55
When you touch <go to
Load>, the instrument
j
umps to the Registration
Load screen.
If you wish to assign a
name before you save, refer
to “Assigning a Name to a
Registration Set” (p. 94).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 98 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
99
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch < >< > in the screen to select the save-
destination number.
Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be
displayed as “- - - - -.”
fig.03-13_55
To cancel the Save operation, touch the <Exit> button to close the
Registration Save screen.
5.
Touch <Save>.
The Save Format screen appears.
fig.03-14_55
6.
Touch <Original> or <R-Series>.
7.
Touch <OK>.
Saving of the registration data will begin.
When saving ends, the “- - - - -” in the screen will change to the registration
name that you saved.
If you have assigned a name, the Registration set will be saved to floppy
disk with that name.
Settings Description
Original
Save formats that can be used with the AT-SL Series
When saved in this format, the data can also be used by AT-
45, AT-15 and AT-S Series devices.
R-Series
Save formats that can be used with AT-R Series devices
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 99 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
100
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
If the following screen appears
If you select a number at which a registration has already been saved and
touch <Save>, the following screen appears.
fig.E-63
If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data
1.
Touch <OK>.
If you wish to save new data instead of updating the registration
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
Rewriting of the Registration will be canceled.
2.
In the Registration Save screen, select the number that is
displayed as “-----” (a number that currently does not contain
registration data).
3.
Save the Registration (p. 98).
When saving is complete, the saved registration name will be displayed.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 100 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
101
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Loading Previously Saved Registration
Sets Into the AT-80SL/60SL
Here’s how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the floppy disk
into the memory of the AT-80SL/60SL. Registrations can be selected in the
following three ways.
Loading a Set of Registrations (Load)
→
p. 101
You can load a “set” (a collection of settings for Registration buttons [1]–[12]
on the AT-80SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8] on the AT-60SL) from floppy
disk.
Loading an Individual Registration (Load One)
→
p. 103
Recall the settings of one of the Registration [1]–[12] buttons (on the AT-
60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]).
Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the
Floppy Disk (Load Next)
→
p. 106
Press the [Load Next] button to recall registration sets in the order in which
they are saved on the floppy disk.
■
Loading a Set of Registrations
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the
disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
NOTE
Be aware that when you
load Registrations from a
disk, the Registrations that
were previously in internal
memory will be lost. It is a
good idea to save
important Registrations to
floppy disk (p. 98).
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by
pressing the [Registration]
b
utton, instead of
performing steps 2 and 3.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 101 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
102
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
3.
Touch <Load>.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05_55
4.
In the screen, touch < >< > to select the Registration
that you wish to load into internal memory.
To cancel operation, touch <Exit>.
5.
Touch <Load>.
The registration data will start being read.
When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will
reappear.
When you use the Registrations saved on the AT-90/AT-80/AT-30, refer to
“Using Registrations Created on an Earlier Model”
(p. 111)
When you touch <go to
Save>, the instrument
j
umps to the Registration
Save screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 102 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
103
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
■
Loading an Individual Registration
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the
disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
3.
Touch <Load>.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05_55
4.
In the screen, touch < >< > to select the registration
that you wish to load into internal memory.
5.
Touch <Utility> to open the Utility screen.
fig.03-06_55
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by
pressing the [Registration]
b
utton, instead of
performing steps 2 and 3.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 103 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
104
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
6.
Touch <Load One>.
The Load One Registration screen appears.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.03-19_50
7.
In the screen, touch Disk <1>–<12> (on the AT-60SL, Disk
<1>–<8>) to select the number of the registration button that
you wish to load from disk into internal memory.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.03-20_50
8.
In the screen, touch Internal<1>–<12> (on the AT-60SL,
Internal <1>–<8>) to select the number of the storage-
destination button.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.03-21_50
To cancel this operation, touch <Cancel>.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 104 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
105
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
9.
When you’re done making the settings, touch <OK>.
The following display appears.
fig.03-22_55
When the Registration has been loaded, the basic screen will reappear.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 105 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
106
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
■
Recalling the Order that the Registrations are
Saved on the Floppy Disk (Load Next)
On the AT-80SL/60SL, you can simply press the [Load Next] button to
successively recall registrations in the order in which they were saved on the
floppy disk. This function is called “Load Next.”
When you will be performing live, you can save registration sets to floppy
disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform,
you can recall the next registration set easily and smoothly.
1.
Insert the floppy disk on which the registrations are saved
into the floppy disk drive.
2.
Press the [Load Next] button.
The first registration saved on the floppy disk will be recalled into the AT-
80SL/60SL.
The following screen appears.
fig.03-24_55
3.
Press one of the registration [1]–[12] buttons (on the AT-
60SL, registration [1]–[8] buttons).
The registration will be loaded (recalled into internal memory).
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to successively recall the registration
sets.
By using the “Disk Edit”
function, you can modify
the order or the name of the
registrations saved on disk,
or delete an unwanted
registration (p. 94, p. 108, p.
110).
Button Description
Undo
Return to the
registration
that had been
selected before
you pressed
the [Load Next]
button.
OK
Finalize the
registration. It
will not be
possible to
return to the
previous
registration.
Instead of performing step
3, you can also load the
registration by touching
<OK> in the screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 106 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
107
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Checking the next registration set
1. Access the Main screen.
2. Touch the < > icon several times to switch to < >.
The Main screen display will switch to the registration.
If the next registration set is loaded
“Next” will indicate the name of the next registration set.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 107 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
108
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Deleting a Set of Registrations from a
Floppy Disk
Here’s how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a floppy disk.
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the
disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
3.
Touch <Disk Edit>.
The Registration Disk Edit screen appears.
fig.03-25_55
Button Meaning Description
Rename
Modify the name
The Rename screen appears. You can
touch the screen and rename the
selected registration (p. 94).
Up
Change the order
(upward)
The selected registration will be
moved earlier in the order (p. 110).
Down
Change the order
(downward)
The selected registration will be
moved later in the order (p. 110).
Delete
Delete the
Registration
The selected registration will be
deleted.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 108 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
109
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
4.
In the screen, touch < >< > to select the registration
that you wish to delete.
5.
Touch <Delete>.
The following display appears.
fig.03-16_55
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
6.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the registration, touch
<OK>.
When the Registration has been deleted, the Registration Disk Edit screen
will reappear.
When a registration is deleted, the deleted registration name will change to
“- - - - -.”
fig.03-28_55
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 109 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
110
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Changing the Order of Registration on
Floppy Disk
After saving registrations on floppy disk, you can change the order or name
of the registrations (p. 94), or delete a registration (p. 108). This is very
convenient when you are preparing to use the [Load Next] button (Load
Next function
→
p. 106) to recall successive registrations while you play.
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the
disk drive.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
3.
Touch <Disk Edit>.
The Registration Disk Edit screen appears.
fig.03-25_55
4.
Touch < >< > in the screen to select a registration.
5.
Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the registration.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Button Mean Description
Rename
Modify the name
The Rename screen appears. You can
touch the screen and rename the
selected registration (p. 94).
Up
Change the order
(upward)
The selected registration will be
moved earlier in the order.
Down
Change the order
(downward)
The selected registration will be
moved later in the order.
Delete
Delete the
Registration
The selected registration will be
deleted (p. 108).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 110 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
111
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
Using Registrations Created on an
Earlier Model
Registrations that were created on the ATELIER series (AT-90/80/30) or
ATELIER-R series (AT-90R/80R/60R/30R/20R) can be used on the AT-
80SL/60SL.
When using a set of registrations that was created on the AT-90/80/60
models, your registrations will be converted to work in the AT-80SL/60SL
models and loaded into internal memory. When loading these registrations
the music style that was originally used can also be loaded into the [Disk/
User] button to complete the accurate reproduction of the original
registration.
Recalling a registration that was created on the “AT-90/80/30”
1.
Insert the floppy disk that contains Registrations created on
an earlier model of the ATELIER series.
2.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
fig.03-04_55
3.
Touch <Load>.
The Registration Load screen appears.
fig.03-05_55
This operation is not
necessary when recalling a
registration that was
created on a model in the
AT-R series.
You can also open the
Registration Load screen by
pressing the [Registration]
button, without performing
steps 2 and 3.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 111 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
112
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
4.
Touch < >< > to select the registration that you wish
to load into internal memory.
fig.03-17_55
To cancel operation, touch <Exit>.
5.
Touch <Load>.
The following screen appears.
fig.03-26_55
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
6.
Touch the screen to select the model on which the
Registration was created.
7.
Touch <OK> to confirm the model on which the Registration
was created.
If the Rhythm used by the Registration is found in the internal memory of
the AT-80SL/60SL, the Registration will be loaded into internal memory.
When loading is complete, the Registration Load screen will reappear.
NOTE
If the Rhythm of the [Disk/
User] button has been
rewritten, there may be
cases in which the
Registration cannot be
loaded correctly.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 112 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
113
Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons
If internal memory does not contain a rhythm specified by the
registration
The number of the included music style disk that contains that rhythm will
be displayed.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.03-27_55
8.
Make a note of the number of the music style disk, and touch
<Exit>.
A similar rhythm that does exist in internal memory will be substituted for
the rhythm that does not exist, and the registration will be loaded.
Loading a AT-90/80/30 rhythm into the [Disk/User] button
If you wish to use a Rhythm used by an earlier model of the ATELIER series
with a Registration that you loaded, load the Rhythm from the Music Style
disk into the [Disk/User] button.
9.
Remove the Registrations floppy disk from the disk drive,
and insert the Music Style disk.
10.
Load the Rhythm whose number you noted in step 8 into the
[Disk/User] button (p. 78).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 113 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
114
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
Transposing to a Different Key
(Key Transpose)
You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the
position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called “Key
Transpose.”
For example: you may play in the familiar C major scale while your music
will sound in any key of your choice.
fig.04-01
1.
Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose [-] and
[+] buttons.
Each time you press a Transpose [-] [+] button, the pitch will be transposed
by a semitone.
Acceptable values range from A to G (in semitone steps).
The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen.
fig.04-02
State of the Transpose [-] [+] buttons
2.
By pressing the Transpose [-] [+] buttons simultaneously,
you can restore the default setting C.
If transposed (non-C) One of the Transpose [-] [+] button indicators is lit.
If not transposed (C) The Transpose [-] [+] button indicators are
extinguished.
Transpose
The transposition setting is
stored in the Registration.
For details on the settings
that are stored in the
Registration, refer to
“Settings That Are Stored
After the Power Is Turned
Off” (p. 255).
You can change the timing
at which the transposition
settings saved in a
Registration will be
recalled. For details refer to
“Changing the Timing at
Which Transposition
Settings are Recalled” (p.
190).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 114 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
115
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound
Using the Brilliance slider, you can adjust the brightness of the sound.
1.
For a brighter sound, push the slider away from you. For a
mellower sound, pull the slider toward you.
fig.04-06
You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the
[Brilliance] slider. You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the
slider downwards.
Adding Decay to the Sound
(Damper Pedal)
When you depress the Damper (Sustain) pedal, a decay effect will be added
to the voices.
While you continue depressing the damper pedal, notes will be sustained
even if you release the keys.
fig.04-04
By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower
keyboard.
Brilliance
Mellow
Bright
NOTE
This setting is not stored in
the Registration.
You can modify the setting
so that decay is only
applied to notes played on
the Upper keyboard (p.
187).
NOTE
Decay cannot be added to
the Solo voices.
Decay can be applied to
Pedal Bass voices played
on the Lower keyboard
(when the Pedal [To
Lower] or [Bass Split]
b
utton indicators are lit). In
this case, a decay will not
b
e applied to the pedal bass
voice.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 115 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
116
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
Pitch Bend and Vibrato Effects
When you move the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever to the left or right, you can
obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played (Pitch Bend
effect). Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch, and to the left to lower
it. Also, when you push the lever away from you, a vibrato effect can be
obtained.
fig.04-05
By default (immediately after the power is turned on) the Pitch Bend effect
is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper
keyboard.
Bender
Vibrato
You can change the settings
so that both the Pitch Bend
and Vibrato effects are
applied to the Lower
keyboard voice or the
voices on the Pedalboard.
Please refer to “Selecting
the Range of Keys to
Which the Pitch Bend/
Vibrato Lever will Apply”
(p. 187).
You can also adjust the
range of the pitch which is
shifted by the Pitch Bend
lever. For details, refer to
“Changing the Pitch
Bend Range” (p. 188).
NOTE
Please note that only the
appropriate voices will
allow vibrato to be added
(p. 220).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 116 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
117
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
Using the Foot Switches
On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches. Different
functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches.
fig.04-07
You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot
Switches. Please refer to
“Changing the Function of the Foot Switch”
(p.
118).
With the factory settings, the following functions are assigned to the left and
right Foot Switches.
You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual
Registration buttons (p. 90).
Right Foot Switch
Switch the Rotary effect between Fast/Slow.
If Rotary is turned on, the Rotary effect will switch
between “Fast” and “Slow” each time you press the Foot
Switch.
Left Foot Switch
Glide (an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a
semitone while the foot switch is pressed, and is
returned to what is originally was when you release
your foot).
While you are pressing the Foot Switch, the pitch will be
temporarily lowered. When you release the Foot Switch,
the pitch will return to normal gradually.
The Glide effect will only
b
e applied to the keyboard
section that has been
specified as being the
destination for the Pitch
b
end/Vibrato lever. Please
refer to “Selecting the
Range of Keys to Which
the Pitch Bend/Vibrato
Lever will Apply” (p. 187).
NOTE
If “Regist Shift” is turned
“RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or
“RIGHT +Load Next,” the
foot switch will function
only to switch registrations
(p. 119).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 117 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
118
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
■
Changing the Function of the
Foot Switch
You can select any of the following functions and assign
them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the
Expression Pedal.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the L Foot Switch or
R Foot Switch.
4.
Touch <L Foot Switch> or <R Foot Switch>
setting.
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
If the “Regist Shift (Registration Shift)” setting (p. 119) is
“RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or “RIGHT + Load next,” the Foot Switch
will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations, and
the “R Foot Switch” or “L Foot Switch” setting will be
ignored (p. 119).
Available functions Description
ROTARY FAST/SLOW
Switch the Rotary speed between
“FAST” and “SLOW.”
GLIDE
While the Foot Switch is pressed,
the pitch will temporarily be
lowered, and will gradually
return to normal when you
release the Foot Switch. When
the power is turned on, Glide
effect is added to the voice of all
the sections being played on
Upper keyboard.
LEADING BASS
The Leading Bass function (p. 72)
will operate only while you
continue pressing the Foot
Switch.
RHYTHM START/STP
Start/Stop the Rhythm.
COMP PLAY/STOP
The same function as the
Composer [Play/Stop] button.
Each time you press the Foot
Switch, the performance data
will play back or stop.
INTRO/ENDING
Play an Intro or Ending.
FILL IN TO VAR
After inserting a Fill-In, playback
will switch to the variation
pattern.
FILL IN TO ORIG
After inserting a Fill-In, playback
will switch to the original
pattern.
ORCHESTRATOR
Switch the Style Orchestrator
button.If the Style Orchestrator
[Basic] button or [Advanced2]
button is selected, the [Basic] and
[Advanced2] buttons will be
switched.If the [Advanced1]
button or [Full] button is
selected, the [Advanced1] button
and [Full] button will be
switched.
BREAK
Stop the rhythm at the end of that
measure.
DAMPER OF UPPER
Notes played on the Upper
keyboard will be sustained only
while you continue pressing the
Foot Switch.
DAMPER OF LOWER
Notes played on the Lower
keyboard will be sustained only
while you continue pressing the
Foot Switch.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 118 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
119
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
■
Using the Foot Switch to Switch
Registrations
You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for
selecting Registrations in order.
NOTE
The Regist Shift settings are stored to each individual
Registration Set. When “RIGHT + Load Next” is assigned to
the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch
Registration Sets saved to a floppy disk, set the Regist Shift
setting to “RIGHT + Load Next” for all saved Registrations.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Regist Shift.
4.
Touch the Regist Shift setting.
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while the power
is turned off.
What is “Load Next”?
You can use the Load Next function to call up
Registrations in the order saved to the floppy disk.
When you will be performing live, you can save
registration sets to floppy disk in the order in which you
will be performing. Then while you perform, you can
recall the next registration set easily and smoothly.
Checking the next registration set
1.
Display the Main screen (p. 26).
2.
Touch the < > icon several times to switch
to < >.
The Main screen display will switch to the registration.
“Next” will indicate the name of the next registration set.
Setting Descriptions
OFF
You can use a function assigned to the
foot switch.
RIGHT
The right foot switch is dedicated to
switching registrations. The function
assigned to the right foot switch cannot
be used.
LEFT
The left foot switch is dedicated to
switching registrations. The function
assigned to the left foot switch cannot be
used.
RIGHT +
Load Next
The right foot switch is dedicated to
switching registrations. The function
assigned to the right foot switch cannot
be used.
Selecting the Registration [12] button
(on the AT-60SL, registration [8] button)
and pressing the right foot switch
activates the Load Next function, calling
up the next registration saved to the
disk. The Registration Load window
appears in the display. When you then
press the right foot switch again, the
Registration Set is confirmed, and the
Registration [1] button is selected.
Example:
1
→
2
→
3...
→
12 (8, on the AT-60SL)
→
Load Next
→
(Next Registration) 1
Setting Descriptions
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 119 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
120
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an
Expression Pedal
You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume. When you
depress the Expression Pedal, the volume increases. The volume decreases
as you tilt the pedal back.
fig.04-03
You can specify how the
Expression Pedal will affect
the sound when it is
pressed (p. 121).
Decrease
the volume
Increase
the volume
You can also specify
whether the Expression
Pedal will or will not
control the volume during
the recording of your
performance (p. 186).
Likewise you can specify
whether the Expression
Pedal will or will not
control the volume during
the playback of recorded
performance (p. 187).
Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even
richer musical expressiveness.
The expression pedal features the following special characteristics:
•Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to
zero. If you do want to turn down the volume completely, set the
[Master Volume] slider to the Min (Minimum) position.
• Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the
volume, the lower-range portion will linger on. This provides a natural-
sounding resonance.
• When an Active Expression voice is selected, the expression pedal can
be used to produce changes in the voice (p. 49).
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 120 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
121
Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions
■
Adjusting the Depth of the
Expression Pedal
You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on
the expression pedal.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Exp. Curve
(Expression Curve).
4.
Touch <Exp. Curve> setting.
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
Setting Descriptions
1
The position of the expression pedal does
not really affect the rhythm performances
and Automatic Accompaniment.
This setting is convenient when you do not
want to have the rhythm or Automatic
Accompaniment volume change much.
2
The expression pedal is applied to the
rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment
just as it is to the keyboard performance.
The volume is easily adjusted according to
the angle of the expression pedal, making
this setting perfect for use in songs with big
changes in dynamics.
3
The expression pedal is applied to the
rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment
just as it is to the keyboard performance.
The expression affect is applied more gently
than with Setting 2, so this setting is
appropriate for quieter songs with less
intense dynamic changes.
4
The expression pedal does not affect the
rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at
all.
This setting is suitable for ensemble
performances and other performances
featuring multiple instruments.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 121 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
122
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
The AT-80SL/60SL allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you
play from the keyboard.
Adding Harmony to a Melody
(Harmony Intelligence)
Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be
added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard. This function is
called “Harmony Intelligence.”
When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] buttons, the voice most suitable
for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.
1.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, getting its indicator
to light up.
Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit)
and OFF.
The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.
fig.05-04_70
■
Changing the Type of Harmony Intelligence
There are 18 different Harmony types (AT-80SL).
There are 12 different Harmony types (AT-60SL).
When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button to turn it on (lit), a voice
most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected
automatically. The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the
Harmony type.
1.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, getting its indicator
to light up.
The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.
AT-80SL AT-60SL
fig.05-05_70
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 122 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
123
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
2.
Touch < >< > to switch screens, and touch the screen
to select the desired harmony intelligence.
The [Harmony Intelligence] button’s indicator will blink.
3.
Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button once again.
The [Harmony Intelligence] button indicator will light, indicating that the
selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed.
The way in which the keys you press are sounded by each type of harmony
intelligence is described below.
Model Harmony Intelligence Type
AT-
80SL
ORGAN, BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, HYMN, TRADITIONAL,
HARP, DUET, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, COUNTRY, BROADWAY,
OCTAVE 1, OCTAVE 2, 1 NOTE, 2 NOTES, 3 NOTES, 4 NOTES
AT-
60SL
ORGAN, BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, HYMN, TRADITIONAL,
HARP, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, BROADWAY, OCTAVE 1,
OCTAVE 2
Type Solo Voice Upper Voice Number of notes
of the harmony
ORGAN
— Theater Or.3 3
BIG BAND
Trumpet Flugel Horn 4
STRINGS
Strings 1 Strings 1 4
BLOCK
Vibraphone Piano 1 5
HYMN
Choir Choir 4
TRADITIONAL
Currently Selected Tone 3
HARP
—Harp 2
DUET
Trumpet Tp. Section 1
COMBO
Clarinet Trombone 2
JAZZ SCAT
Jazz Scat Jazz Scat 3
COUNTRY
Full Organ1 Jazz Guitar 3
BROADWAY
Celesta Theater Or.1 3
OCTAVE 1
Currently Selected Tone 2
OCTAVE 2
Currently Selected Tone 2
1 NOTE
Currently Selected Tone 2
2 NOTES
Currently Selected Tone 3
3 NOTES
Currently Selected Tone 4
4 NOTES
Currently Selected Tone 5
You can also confirm the
Harmony Intelligence
settings by touching <Exit>
on the Harmony
Intelligence screen.
You can also play the
upper manual to confirm
the type of the Harmony
Intelligence.
NOTE
The number of notes of the
harmony will depend on
the Harmony Intelligence
type.
Harp-type harmony
intelligence does not sound
the keys you play. Use your
left hand to play a chord in
the lower keyboard and use
your right hand to play a
glissando in the upper
keyboard, and a beautiful
harp glissando will be
produced.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 123 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
124
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Adding Modulation to the Sound
(Rotary Effect)
Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers. There is
a choice of two settings: Fast and Slow.
fig.05-06_70
1.
Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect.
2.
Press the Rotary Sound [On/Off] button (confirm that its
indicator is lit).
The Rotary effect will be applied to the voice.
3.
Press the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button to switch
between Rotary Fast (LED lit) and Rotary Slow (LED turned
off).
When you switch the rotary effect from “Fast” to “Slow,” the modulation
will slow down gradually, and when you switch from “Slow” to “Fast” the
modulation will speed up gradually.
Rotary [Fast/Slow] button Effect
LED lit (Fast)
The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers
being rapidly rotated.
LED turned off (Slow)
Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers.
NOTE
For more on the tones to
which the Rotary effect can
b
e applied, refer to Voice
List (AT-80SL) (p. 220) and
Voice List (AT-60SL) (p.
223).
Fast/
Slow
Rotary
Sound
On/ Off
You can assign the Rotary
Sound [Fast/Slow] button
function to the foot
switches located on each
side of the Expression
Pedal (p. 118).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 124 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
125
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
■
Rotary Speed
You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed
of the rotary effect (p. 124).
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17_50
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Rotary Speed.
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Speed
to adjust the setting.
fig.05-12_50
5.
Touch < >< > to edit the value.
Settings
SLOW, NORMAL, FAST
6.
Touch <Exit>.
These settings remain stored in memory even while the
power is off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 125 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
126
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
■
Rotary Color
This setting allows you to choose the brightness of the Rotary
sound obtained when using the Rotary effect (p. 124).
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17_50
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Rotary Color.
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Color
to adjust the setting.
Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting, it will
switch between “BRIGHT” and “MELLOW.”
Settings
BRIGHT, MELLOW
5.
Touch <Exit>.
These settings remain stored in memory even while the
power is off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 126 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
127
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Chorus Effect
Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound, making one
instrument sound like several.
You can apply a chorus effect for the “Upper Symphonic,” “Upper
Orchestral,” “Lower Symphonic,” and “Lower Orchestral” voices.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-09_55
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.05-10_55
2.
Touch either <UPPER> or <LOWER>.
Menu Description
UPPER
To apply chorus to the Upper part
LOWER
To apply chorus to the Lower part
For some of the voices,
Chorus may already be
turned ON.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 127 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
128
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
3.
For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect,
touch the Chorus “ON/OFF” display to change the setting.
Each time you touch the Chorus setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.
fig.05-22
4.
Touch <Exit>.
Sustain Effect
Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or decay to each voice after the
keys are released.
The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper (except the Solo part), Lower,
and Pedal voices.
fig.05-22
1.
Press the Sustain [Pedal] [Lower] [Upper] button for the
keyboard to which you wish to apply Sustain (indicator
lights).
The Sustain effect can be applied simultaneously to the voices of the Upper
part (except the Solo part), Lower part, and Pedal Bass part.
Indication Description
ON
The Chorus effect will be applied to the voice.
OFF
The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice.
NOTE
Some voices do not allow
the Chorus effect to be
applied. For details refer to
“Voice List” (p. 220).
You can open the Lower
Keyboard screen or Upper
Keyboard screen with
touching <Lower>, and
<Upper>.
AT-60SLAT-80SL
Sustain
Upper
LowerPedal
Lower UpperPedal
Sustain
NOTE
The Sustain effect will not
b
e applied to the Solo part
voice.
The length of Sustain can
b
e modified independently
for each keyboard (p. 129).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 128 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
129
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
■
Changing the Sustain Length
The sustain length can be set independently (SHORT,
MIDDLE (Medium) or LONG) for the Upper and Lower
keyboards and Pedalboard. You can make a separate setting
for each keyboard.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
fig.05-10_50
2.
Touch either <UPPER>, <LOWER>, or <PEDAL>.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Sustain Length.
fig.05-14_50
You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard
screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Pedal>,
<Lower>, and <Upper>.
4.
For the part whose sustain length you wish to
adjust, touch the Sustain “SHORT/MIDDLE/
LONG” display.
fig.05-14_50
5.
Touch < >< > to change the value.
Settings
SHORT, MIDDLE, LONG
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Menu Part whose sustain length you wish to
change
UPPER
To change the length of the Upper part.
LOWER
To change the length of the Lower part.
PEDAL
To change the length of the Pedal part.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 129 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
130
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
Reverb Effect
Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound, creating
the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall, a large or small room,
a small club, etc.
AT-80SL
fig.05-16-1_70
1.
Press the Reverb [
▲
] or [
▼
] buttons to adjust the overall
Reverb amount.
When you press the up button [
▲
], additional Reverb is applied. Pressing
the down button [
▼
] decreases the Reverb level. If none of the Reverb
indicators are lit, the Reverb effect will not be heard.
When you press the Reverb [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons, the Part Balance Monitor
screen appears. In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb
depth.
fig.01-27_55
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Reverb SMF Rhythm Organ
Pedal
Orch
Accomp /
The Part Balance Monitor
screen is displayed for
several seconds and then
closes automatically.
If you touch <Hold>, the
screen continues to be
displayed until you touch
<Exit> again.
You can change the type of
reverb, the reverb depth for
each part, and the wall
type. For details refer to
Changing the Reverb
Type (p. 131), Changing
the Depth of the Reverb
(p. 133), and Changing the
Wall Type (p. 132).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 130 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
131
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
■
Changing the Reverb Type
By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy
the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different
locations. You can select from the following 11 types of
Reverb.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17_50
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Reverb Type.
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb Type
to adjust the setting.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-18_50
5.
Touch < >< > to edit the setting.
NOTE
It is not possible to modify the delay time (delay interval)
when “DELAY” or “PAN DELAY” is selected.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Display Description
ROOM 1
Simulates the reverb of a conference room
ROOM 2
Simulates the reverb of a performance
lounge
ROOM 3
Simulates the reverb of a large, open room
HALL 1
Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall
HALL 2
Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
SMALL
CHURCH
The reverberation of a small church
LARGE
CHURCH
The reverberation of a large church
CATHEDRAL
The reverberation of a cathedral
PLATE
Applies a bright, metallic reverb
DELAY
An echo-like sound repeated several times
PAN DELAY
Similarly to the above but where the
sound is panned between the left and right
speakers
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 131 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
132
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
■
Changing the Wall Type
By changing the type of reverb (p. 131) you can experience
the feeling of performing in various different locations, and
by changing the Wall Type (wall material) you can make
further adjustments to the way in which reverberation
occurs.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17_50
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Wall Type.
4.
Touch the value setting buttons for Wall Type to
adjust the setting.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-21_50
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Display Description
DRAPERY
Pleated curtain
CARPET
Carpet
ACOUSTIC
TILE
Acoustical tile, sound-absorptive tile
WOOD
Wood
BRICK
Brick
PLASTER
Plaster
CONCRETE
BLOCK
Concrete block
MARBLE
Marble
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 132 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
133
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
■
Changing the Depth of the
Reverb
The depth of the Reverb can be set (0–10).
To adjust the reverb depth for Upper/
Lower/Pedal/Solo
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <UPPER>, <LOWER>, or <PEDAL>.
The Upper Keyboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or
Pedalboard screen will be displayed.
Upper
fig.05-17_50
Lower
fig.05-17_50
Pedal
fig.05-17_50
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Reverb Depth
4.
Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to
adjust.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-20_50
5.
Touch < >< > to adjust the setting.
Settings
0–10
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 133 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
134
Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound
To adjust the reverb depth for
something other than Upper/Lower/
Pedal/Solo
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.05-08_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Effect>.
The Effect screen appears.
fig.05-17_50
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Rev Depth
(Reverb Depth).
fig.05-17_50
Part
Accomp, Rhythm, Drums, M.Perc, A.Bass
4.
Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to
adjust.
The following screen appears.
fig.05-20_50
5.
Touch < >< > to adjust the setting.
Settings
0–10, AUTO (Accomp, Rhythm, A.Bass
only)
For the three Parts of the Accomp, Rhythm and
Accompaniment Bass, you have the option of selecting
the “AUTO” setting. Parts for which “AUTO” is selected
will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for
the Rhythm currently selected.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 134 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
135
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard
Since the lower keyboard of the AT-80SL/60SL provides a generous 76
notes, you can use it to play piano pieces with ease. In addition, you can
divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices, play the
pedal bass voice, or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility.
For example, the following applications are possible.
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds or Sound
Effects
• Press the Solo [To Lower] button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower
keyboard (p. 137).
fig.06-01
Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
• Press the [Bass Split] button in the Pedal section to play the Pedal Bass voice from the
Lower keyboard (p. 140).
fig.06-02
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
• Press the [Manual Perc] button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower voice
on the lower keyboard (p. 142).
fig.06-03
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 135 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
136
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Playing Drum Sounds from the Entire Lower Keyboard
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds and Solo Voice
By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower
keyboard, and by changing the Solo Split Point (p. 139) and Bass Split Point
(p. 141), you can create the following types of setup.
• Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 56).
fig.06-04
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
• Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 56), and then press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 137)
fig.06-04
Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
fig.06-05
fig.06-06
fig.06-07
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo
■
■
■
■
■
Drums/SFX
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 136 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
137
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower
Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)
Normally, the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard.
By using the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the solo voice in the right-
hand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key. The state in which
the keyboard is divided in this way is called “split,” and the location at
which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard
is called the “Solo Split Point.”
fig.06-08_70
1.
Select a Solo voice (p. 44).
2.
Press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator lights).
When you play the Lower keyboard, the Solo voice will sound in the range
to the right of the Solo Split Point.
fig.06-09
3.
To turn off the Solo split, press the Solo [To Lower] button
(indicator turns off).
The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Solo voice
will now be played in the Upper keyboard.
The key used for the solo
split point is included in
the Solo voice range.
Sax
Violin Trumpet
Flute Oboe
Clarinet
Level
Alternate To Lower
Solo
NOTE
If the Solo [To Lower] is
ON, the Solo voice will not
b
e heard from the upper
keyboard.
Lower keyboard Solo voice
Solo Split Point
You can adjust the Solo
Split Point (p. 139).
You can change how the
Solo voice will sound (p.
138).
You can layer the Solo
voice with the Lower voice
so that they will sound
together (p. 138).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 137 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
138
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
■
Changing How the Solo Voice
Responds
When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or
the Lower keyboard, you can specify how the Solo voice will
respond when more than one key is pressed.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <UPPER>.
The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Solo Mode.
4.
Touch the Solo Mode setting (the TOP NOTE,
LAST NOTE, or POLYPHONIC indication).
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
■
Layering the Solo Voice and
Lower Voice
When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard
(i.e., when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON), you can
specify whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will
sound together (layered), or will sound separately (split).
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <UPPER>.
The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Solo To Lower
Mode.
4.
Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to switch
between “SPLIT” and “LAYER.”
Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting, it
will alternate between “SPLIT” and “LAYER.”
5.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
TOP NOTE
The Solo voice will sound the
highest note that is played for the
Solo part.
LAST NOTE
he Solo voice will sound the note
that was most recently played for
the Solo part.
POLYPHONIC
The Solo voice will sound all notes
that are played for the Solo part.
Setting Descriptions
SPLIT
The parts will sound separately.
LAYER
The Lower voice and Solo voice will
sound together.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 138 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
139
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
■
Changing the Solo Split Point
This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point (lower
limit of the playable range of the Solo voice) on the Lower
keyboard to any desired position.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.06-10_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
ffig.06-12_50
2.
Touch <Split Point>.
The Split Point screen appears.
fig.06-13_50
3.
Touch < >< > to change the Solo Split
Point.
Settings
E1 to G7
4.
Touch <Exit>.
You can also set the split point by pressing the key of the
lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split Point.
fig.06-
1.
While touching the Solo Split Point value (E1–G7
indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key
in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as
the Solo Split Point.
The Solo Split Point will be set in the Split Point screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 139 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
140
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the
Bass Voice ([Bass Split] Button)
By using the [Bass Split] button you can play the bass voice in the left-hand
side (including C3) of the lower keyboard. The location at which the lower
keyboard is divided in this way, to play the pedal bass voice, is called the
“Bass Split Point.”
fig.06-15_70
1.
Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 43).
2.
Press the Pedal [Bass Split] button (indicator lights).
When you play the Lower keyboard, the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the
range to the left of (and including) the C3 note.
fig.06-16
3.
To turn off the Bass split, press the Pedal [Bass Split] button
(indicator turns off).
The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Pedal
Bass voice will now be played in the pedalboard.
The bass split point is
included in the left-hand
area of the keyboard.
Theater
Organ
1
Organ
2
Octave
Up
Pipe Electric Bass &
Cymbal
Octave
Up
String
Contrabass
OrchestralOrgan
Pedal
Lower
To
Bass
Split
NOTE
If the Pedal [Bass Split] is
ON, the Pedal Bass voice
will not be heard from the
pedalboard.
NOTE
It is not possible to select
and play both [Bass Split]
and Pedal [To Lower]
b
uttons simultaneously.
Lower keyboard
Pedal Bass voice
Bass Split Point
You can adjust the Bass
Split Point (p. 141).
NOTE
If the [Bass Split] is ON, the
Pedal Bass voice will not be
heard from the Pedalboard.
The Pedal Bass voice will
sound from the Lower
keyboard.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 140 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
141
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
■
Changing the Bass Split Point
You can assign the Bass Split Point (the highest key up to
which the Pedal Bass voice will sound), to any key of the
Lower keyboard.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
fig.06-10_50
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
ffig.06-12_50
2.
Touch <Split Point>.
The Split Point screen appears.
fig.06-13_50
3.
Touch < >< > to modify the Bass Split
Point.
Settings
E1 to G7
4.
Touch <Exit>.
You can also set the bass split point by playing the desired
key of the lower keyboard.
fig.06-
1.
While touching the Bass Split Point value (E1–G7
indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key
in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as
the Bass Split Point.
The bass split point will be set in the Split Point screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 141 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
142
Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively
Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the
Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button)
By using the Pedal [To Lower] button, you can sound the Pedal Bass voice
by playing the root note (see p. 249) of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the
area that is playing the Lower voice.
fig.06-18
1.
Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 43).
2.
Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights).
When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the
Lower voice, the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root
note.
If the “Leading Bass” function is on (p. 72), the lowest note played in the
lower keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice.
3.
To turn off the Solo split, press the Pedal [To Lower] button
(indicator turns off).
The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard.
NOTE
If no portion of the Lower
keyboard is sounding the
Lower voice (the [Drums/
SFX] button is ON), the
Pedal Bass voice will not
sound.
Theater
Organ
1
Organ
2
Octave
Up
Pipe Electric Bass &
Cymbal
Octave
Up
String
Contrabass
OrchestralOrgan
Pedal
Lower
To
Bass
Split
NOTE
It is not possible to select
and play both [Bass Split]
and Pedal [To Lower]
buttons simultaneously.
NOTE
If the Pedal [To Lower] is
ON, the Pedal Bass voice
will not be heard from the
Pedalboard.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 142 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
143
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
The internal composer can record performances and play
back commercial SMF music files.
The composer can be used in the following two ways.
Using the Panel Composer Buttons
fig.07-01
Touching <Rec/Play> in the Main Screen to
Open the Rec/Play Screen and Using the Rec/
Play Screen’s Composer Buttons
fig.07-04_50
Button Description
Reset
Returns you to the start of the song.
Play/Stop
Starts and stops playback of the song.
After the [Rec] button has been pressed,
putting the composer in record standby
mode, recording then starts when the
[Play/Stop] is pressed.
Rec
The unit switches to record standby
mode.
*In record standby, the [Rec] button is
lit, and the [Play/Stop] button flashes.
Song
The Song Select screen appears in the
display.
Registration
The Registration Load screen appears in
the display.
Demo
When you press the [Demo] button
while a floppy disk is in the disk drive,
all of the songs on the floppy disk are
played back one after another.
(When no floppy disk is in the disk
drive)
The Demo screen opens.
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Button Description
Track
Rhythm
Accmp
Bass
Lower
Upper
Solo
Control
Buttons for tracks to which
performances are recorded light up.
A lighted button can be toggled
between lighted and unlit by pressing it.
Tracks are muted when the button’s
light is off.
→
For more about the track buttons,
refer to p. 144.
Reset
Returns you to the beginning of the
song.
Stop
Stops playback of the song.
Play
Starts playback of the song.
After <Rec> has been touched to put the
composer in record standby mode,
recording then starts when you touch
<Play>.
Rec
The unit switches to record standby
mode.
* In record standby, <Rec> is lit, and
<Play> flashes.
Bwd
Rewinds the song.
Fwd
Fast forwards the song.
You can toggle between display of the
track buttons, the bouncing ball, or the
track mute buttons by touching the
button.
The Notation screen appears in the
display.
The Utility screen for the Composer is
displayed.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 143 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
144
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
■
What is a Track Button?
The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to
the seven Track buttons according to the recorded part. You
can record or play back independently by specifying the
desired Track button; for example, when you wish to re-
record a track.
fig.07-04_50
You can record different kinds of performance data into each
track:
More information about the track assignments when playing
commercial SMF music files, please refer to
“Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track
Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF
Music Files”
(p. 147).
Track Recorded performance
Rhythm
Rhythm performance
Drums/SFX
Manual percussion
Accmp
Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
Bass
Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data (Note,
Bender, Modulation)
Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment,
Lower
Lower Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold,
Bender, Modulation)
Upper
Upper Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold,
Bender, Modulation, After Touch)
Solo
Solo Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold,
Bender, Modulation, After Touch)
Control
Glide
Expression
Reverb Type
Reverb Depth
Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Transpose [-] [+] button setting
[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)
Harmony Intelligence Type
Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)
Rotary [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)
Pedal Bass Mode
Control
Solo Mode
Solo To Lower Mode
Solo Split Point
[Bass Split] button (ON/OFF)
Bass Split Point
Sustain ON/OFF
Sustain Length
Initial Touch
Wall Type
The Voices assigned for each part
Level [
▲
][
▼
] (Part Balance Volume)
The Reverb depth for each part
The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice
The Octave settings for each part
[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)
Drums/SFX Set
[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)
Manual Percussion Set
Chord Intelligence
Chord Hold
Leading Bass
Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF)
Tempo setting
Volume of the rhythm Accompaniment part
Reverb depth of the rhythm
Accompaniment part
Volume of the rhythm drum part
Reverb depth of the rhythm drum part
Volume of the rhythm bass part
Reverb depth of the rhythm bass part
Track Recorded performance
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 144 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
145
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
During recording, the control track will store the operations
as follows.
• Recording panel operations (Voice selections, Tempo
changes, etc.)
Newly recorded performance data will be added
without erasing the previously recorded data.
• Recording expression pedal operations
This will depend on the function of the expression pedal.
Recording of expression operations will differ
depending on the setting for “Exp. Src (Rec).”
For details refer to
“Changing the Function of the
Expression Pedal”
(p. 186).
If you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new
performance data, use the editing function “Erase” (erase
performance data) to erase the data (p. 168).
■
Displaying the Track Buttons
The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you
record or play back a performance.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
fig.07-03_50
The Rec/Play screen appears.
The following buttons are referred to as the track
buttons.
fig.07-04_50
All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accmp” track
button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the
rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.”
If you want to mute only a portion of the rhythms or
accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch
off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 148).
Playing Back Performance
Songs Stored on Floppy Disk
and SMF Music Files
In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the
instrument and saved to a floppy disk, AT-80SL/60SL also
lets you enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song
files, such as defined below.
To play back only one song
1.
Hold the floppy disk with the label facing
upwards, and push it into the disk drive until it
clicks into place.
The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the
keyboard.
fig.02-18_50
NOTE
Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress,
since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable. (The disk drive’s indicator will light
up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading or
writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less brightly lit,
or be extinguished.)
Eject buttonIndicator
Floppy Disk
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 145 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
146
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
When the performance song loaded from a disk is a Standard
MIDI File, “ ” will be displayed on the Main screen.
fig.07-06
2.
Press the [Song] button.
fig.07-09
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-10_50
3.
In the screen, touch < >< > to select the song
that you wish to play back.
4.
Touch < > to play back the song.
5.
Touch < > to stop the song.
You can also play back or stop the music data by touching
<Play> or <Stop> in the Rec/Play screen. By touching
<Bwd> or <Fwd> you can rewind or fast-forward the
performance.
6.
Press the Eject button.
fig.02-19
The floppy disk is ejected a little out of the slot. Gently
grasp the end of the floppy disk and pull it out.
Playing back all performance data
1.
Hold the floppy disk with the label facing
upwards, and push it into the disk drive until it
clicks into place.
The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the
keyboard.
2.
Press the [Demo] button.
fig.01-01
All performance data saved on the floppy disk will be
played consecutively.
3.
To stop playback, press the [Play/Stop] button.
fig.07-08
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Eject Button
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 146 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
147
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Silencing a Specific Track
(Track Mute)
When the Rec/Play screen is displayed, the track button will
light to indicate a track in which a performance has been
recorded. By turning off these track buttons, you can
temporarily silence the sound. This is referred to as “Track
Mute.”
1.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31_50
2.
In the screen, touch < >< > to select the song
that you wish to play back.
3.
Touch <Load> to load the song.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accmp” track
button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the
rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.”
If you want to mute only a portion of the rhythms or
accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch
off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 148).
4.
Press a track button that is lit, extinguishing the
button.
When you play back the performance, track buttons that
are not lighted will be muted (silenced).
fig.07-14
5.
Press the track button once again (button lights).
The part that had been muted will return to normal and
will be heard.
Correspondence Between Track Buttons and
Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back
Commercial SMF Music Files
Correspondence Between Track Buttons and
Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back
Performance Data Created with an Music
Atelier
Track button Channel
Rhythm 10
Accmp 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Bass 2
Lower 3
Upper 4
Solo 1
Track button Track Mute button
Rhythm 10, 11 (Drums/SFX),
13 (Manual Percussion)
Accmp 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 15
Bass 2 (Bass)
Lower 3 (Lower)
Upper 4 (Upper)
Solo 1 (Solo)
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 147 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
148
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
■
Muting Individual Tracks of
Performance Data
All accompaniment data is grouped to the “Accmp” track
button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the
rhythm performance data is grouped to “Rhythm.”
You can mute only a portion of the rhythms or
accompaniment on the Track Mute screen.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > a number of times.
The Track Mute screen appears.
Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the display.
From the left, these are “Track 1, Track 2 ... Track 15, and
Track 16.”
3.
Touch the screen to select the track that you wish
to mute.
The button you’ve touched goes out, indicating the
sound is muted.
4.
When you touch an unlit track button, the track
button lights up, indicating muting of the track is
cancelled.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
Track mute will be defeated when you perform the following
operations.
• Select different performance data.
The seven Track buttons in the Rec/Play screen (p. 147)
correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track
Mute screen as shown below.
Commercial SMF Music Files
Performance Data Created on the Atelier
* The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance
data created on an Atelier.
Track Mute Button Track Button
1 (Solo) Solo
2 (Pedal) Pedal
3 (Lower) Lower
4 (Upper) Upper
5–9, 11–16 (Acmp) Accmp
10 (Rhythm) Rhythm
Track Mute Button Track Button
1 (Solo) Solo
2 (Pedal) Pedal
3 (Lower) Lower
4 (Upper) Upper
5–9, 12, 14, 15 (Acmp) Accmp
10 (Rhythm) Rhythm
11 (Drums/SFX) Rhythm
13 (Manual Percussion) Rhythm
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 148 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
149
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Viewing a Notation
You can display the notations of performances from music
files and recordings made on the AT-80SL/60SL. This is very
convenient when you want to read the music as you play and
to confirm recorded songs.
Selecting Songs
→
There is no need to select the song when displaying notations
for performances recorded with the Composer. Start from Step
5.
1.
Take the floppy disk containing the song whose
notations you want to display and insert it into
the floppy disk drive.
2.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31_50
3.
Touch < >< > to select the song whose
notation is to be displayed.
4.
Touch <Load>.
After the song is loaded, the Rec/Play screen opens.
Displaying Notations
5.
Touch <DigiScore> on the Rec/Play screen.
The Notation screen appears.
fig.07-
Touching the illustration of speaker on screen, you can
mute the part. This is convenient for muting a specific part
you want to practice. Touch the speaker icon once more
to have the sound play again.
Display Explanation
Enlarge the notation display.
Display lyrics in the notation.
Display the Bass part notation.
Display the Lower part notation.
Display the Upper part notation.
Display the Upper part and Lower part
notations.
You can change the part that is displayed,
and change the way in which the notation
is displayed (p. 150).
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 149 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
150
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
■
Changing the Notation
Settings
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main Screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
2.
Touch <DigiScore>.
The Notation screen appears.
fig.07-
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Notation Options screen appears.
fig.07-
fig.07-
4.
Touch the button for the item whose setting you
want to change.
Menu Setting Explanation
Pitch
C,D,E
Letter names (fixed do)
are display in the detailed
notation.
Do,Re,Mi
Solmization syllables
(movable do) are
displayed in the detailed
notation.
OFF Not displayed
Clef
Upper
AUTO Display is switched
automatically.
G Clef Displayed the G-clef staff
of the upper part.
F Clef Displayed the F-clef staff
of the upper part.
Clef
Lower
AUTO Display is switched
automatically.
G Clef Displayed the G-clef staff
of the lower part.
F Clef Displayed the F-clef staff
of the lower part.
Key
AUTO Key is switched
automatically.
Db, Ab, Eb,
Bb, F, C, G,
D, A, E, B,
F#, Bbm,
Fm, Cm,
Gm, Dm,
Am, Em,
Bm, F#m,
C#m, G#,
D#m
Display the notation in
the selected key.
Upper
Part
1–16
Select the part to be
displayed as the upper
part.
Lower
Part
1–16
Select the part to be
displayed as the lower
part.
Bass Part
1–16
Select the part to be
displayed as the bass
part.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 150 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
151
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
fig.07-
When you touch <Key>, the following screen appears.
fig.07-
fig.07-
The Key screen is composed of two screens. Touch
<> to switch between the two screens.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Some notes on a Score screen
• When you start playback of music files, the marks
appears. While this appears on the notation, the AT-
80SL/60SL is reading data. Please wait until reading of
the data is complete.
•In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend
beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
• The notations that are presented by the display are
produced based on the music files. Viewing ease is given
priority over precise expression when dealing with
complex, high-level music. Because of this, you may find
that the notation shown in the display does not match
what is provided on commercially available sheet music.
The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable
for the display of difficult, complex musical works that
demand accurate notation. In addition, the display
cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.
• If you select a part that does not contain performance
data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Use
<Option> to change the part that is displayed.
• If you use the buttons located below the display to
change the displayed part while the song is playing, the
song may be played back from the beginning.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 151 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
152
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Recording a Performance
You can record the performance that you play. You can also
record your performance while playing rhythms or
automatic accompaniment.
fig.07-12
1.
Select the panel settings needed for recording the
performance.
2.
Make sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the
disk drive.
If a floppy disk is in the disk drive, press the Eject button
(p. 146) and remove the floppy disk.
3.
Enter the recording standby mode by pressing the
[Rec] button.
The [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop]
button will blink.
4.
Press the [Play/Stop] button to start recording.
When you press the [Play/Stop] button, the metronome
will play two measures (bars) of count-in before
recording begins.
If you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
as you record, press the [Start/Stop] button instead of the
[Play/Stop] button to begin recording. Also, if the [Sync
Start] button is lit (i.e., if Sync Start is ON), recording will
begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard.
5.
Press the [Play/Stop] button when you have
completed your recording.
The Track indicator where a performance song is
recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light.
When you press the [Intro/Ending] button (or [Start/
Stop] button) while recording a Rhythm performance or
Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance
and Automatic Accompaniment will stop. However, the
recording itself will continue. Press the [Play/Stop]
button to stop recording.
The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of
the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal
(p. 118).
You can also choose to cancel the metronome count-in before
recording starts (p. 192).
Caution
If you press the [Rec] button when a song has been selected
from the floppy disk, the selected song will be completely
loaded into the AT-80SL/60SL and the Composer will enter
into the recording standby mode. To record a new song, use
the following procedure.
1.
Press the [Rec] button to cancel recording
standby.
2.
Take the floppy disk out of the disk drive.
3.
Delete the performance data (p. 156).
4.
Press the [Rec] button.
fig.07-12-2
The following screen appears
fig.E-61
When the instrument’s memory is nearing capacity.
fig.E-30
When recording was automatically canceled because the
memory limit was reached.
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
34, 5
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 152 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
153
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Playing Back a Performance
Song
fig.07-08*
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
fig.07-03_50
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
2.
Touch <Reset>.
The location at which playback will start will return to
the beginning of measure 1.
If you wish to begin playback from the middle of the
song, touch <Bwd> <Fwd> to move to the measure from
which you wish to begin playback.
3.
Touch <Play> to begin playback.
After playback reaches the end of the performance, it
will stop automatically.
You can also begin playback by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
4.
To stop playback at any point, touch the <Stop>
button.
You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer [Play/
Stop] button.
The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of
the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal
(p. 118).
You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will
affect the playback and what you play while Atelier music
file is being played back (p. 187).
NOTE
If you load performance data (such as SMF music files) that
was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play
it back, you may find, when playing rhythms and automatic
accompaniment, that the music doesn’t sound quite like it
should. (For example, the wrong sounds could be played). If
you want the data to be played back accurately, first press
the [Reset] button prior to playback.
Add a Count Sound to Match
the Timing (Count In Play)
In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a
song, you can have a count sound played before playback of
the song begins, allowing you to synchronize your own
performance with the song.
Playing back a song after playing the count sound is called
“Count In Play.”
1.
Hold down the [Reset] button and press the [Play/
Stop] button.
The metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-
in before recording begins.
RegistrationSong
Composer
Reset Rec
Play / Stop
Demo
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 153 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
154
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Recording Each Part
Separately
In this method, each part (track button) is recorded one after
another: first the Rhythm part, then the bass part, etc. If there
are any previously recorded performances, you can listen to
them as you record additional parts.
1.
Select the panel settings needed for recording the
performance.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
3.
Touch the <Bwd> and <Fwd> buttons to select
the desired measure (bar) when you start
recording.
If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the
song, touch the <Reset> button.
4.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter
recording-standby mode.
<Play> and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen
will blink. The track buttons that are already recorded
will light.
fig.07-15
Also, the panel Composer [Rec] button indicator will
light, and [Play/Stop] button will blink.
You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the
Composer [Rec] button.
5.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin
recording.
When you touch <Play> in the Rec/Play screen, the
metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then
recording will begin.
As you listen to the performance song previously
recorded, record the Part into a new Track.
You can also start recording by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
6.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop
recording.
The track button for which performance data has been
recorded will be lit.
You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
blinklit
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 154 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
155
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Re-Recording
If you made a mistake in your performance during recording
etc., you can re-record just a portion of the musical data in
the track.
NOTE
If you wish to re-record with different settings for voices,
tempo, part balance, erase the recorded song (p. 156) and re-
record again. If the Control track still contains data from
before you re-recorded, the volume or sounds may change
during playback.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
2.
Touch the <Bwd> and <Fwd> buttons to select
the desired measure (bar) when you start
recording.
If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the
song, touch the <Reset> button.
3.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter
recording-standby mode.
<Play> and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen
will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are
already recorded will light.
fig.07-15
Also, the panel Composer [Rec] button indicator will
light, and [Play/Stop] button will blink.
You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the
Composer [Rec] button.
4.
Touch the Track button which you wish to re-
recording (button flashes).
The song data of the specified Track (with the exception
of the Control Track) will be erased as new song data is
recorded.
When the Track button is lit constantly, no song data has
been recorded on that Track.
5.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin
recording.
The metronome will sound a two-measure count, and
then recording will begin.
You can also start recording by pressing the Composer
[Play/Stop] button.
6.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop
recording.
The buttons of tracks which were re-recorded will
change from flashing to being constantly lit.
You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer [Play/
Stop] button.
NOTE
If you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data, and
record only the panel operations, you can make settings to
prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being
recorded (p. 186).
You can use punch-in recording (p. 163) to re-record only the
area that you specify.
blinklit
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 155 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
156
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Erasing a Performance Song
(Song Clear)
If you wish to discard your recording and re-record from the
beginning, or if you wish to record a new performance, you
must erase the previously-recorded data.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22_50
3.
Touch <Song Clear>.
The following message, asking you to confirm your
choice, will be displayed.
fig.E-62
If you touch <Cancel>, the performance data will not be
erased, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.
4.
If you touch <OK>, the performance data will be
erased.
Changing the Name of a
Performance Song (Rename)
A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that
you record. However, at some point you may wish to change
the name to something more meaningful.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22_50
3.
Touch <Save/Delete>.
The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.
fig.07-23
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 156 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
157
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
4.
Touch <Utility> to open the Utility screen.
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-23
5.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
fig.07-25_50
6.
Touch the character select button ( ) to
switch among uppercase/lowercase/symbols.
Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle
through the available choices, like this: uppercase
→
lowercase
→
symbols
→
uppercase...
7.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
8.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<OK>.
The new name is now inserted.
fig.07-26
NOTE
You cannot directly change or edit the name of a
performance song stored on a disk. The song must first be
loaded (p. 159) into the instrument, edited, and then saved to
disk again.
You can also access the Rename screen as follows.
1. Touch < > (Utility) on the Rec/Play screen.
The Utility screen appears.
2. In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
3. Touch <Rename> on the Edit Menu screen.
The Rename screen appears.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
! “ # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Deletes a character.
Inserts a space (blank).
Move the cursor (the symbol that
indicates the location at which characters
will be input) to left or right.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 157 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
158
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Saving Performance Songs
Onto Floppy Disk
The performance data that you recorded will disappear
when the power of the AT-80SL/60SL is turned off. If you
wish to keep the performance data, you can save it on a
floppy disk.
If the performance data has never been saved to a floppy
disk, a “ ” symbol appears on the Main screen. When
the performance data is saved to a floppy disk, this symbol
will no longer be displayed.
1.
Make sure that the disk drive contains a disk that
was formatted by the AT-80SL/60SL.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-22_50
4.
Touch <Save/Delete>.
The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.
fig.07-22_50
5.
Touch < >< > to select the number of the
save destination.
Numbers which have not been used in the saving
operation will be displayed as “- - - - -.”
fig.07-28_50
To cancel the Save operation, touch the <Exit> to close
the Song Save/Song Delete screen.
6.
Touch <Save>.
The Save Format screen appears.
fig.07-29_50
7.
Touch the screen to select the format in which the
data will be saved.
You can select either “ORIGINAL” or “SMF” format.
8.
Touch <OK> to finalize the save format.
Saving of the performance data will begin.
Display Description
ORIGINAL
Save data in Atelier format
SMF
Saving in SMF Format for Atelier Sound
Modules
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 158 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
159
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
NOTE
Performance data saved by the Atelier cannot be played back
properly by the sound generator of an instrument that is not
a member of the Atelier series.
NOTE
Saving performance data in SMF format (SMF) requires a
longer time than saving it in Atelier format (ORIGINAL).
If the following screen appears
If you select a number at which a performance data has
already been saved and touch <Save>, the following screen
appears.
fig.E-62
If you wish to update the contents of the
performance data
1.
Touch <OK>.
If you wish to save the data without erasing
the performance data already on disk you
must rename the song
1.
Touch <Cancel> to stop the Save operation.
2.
In the Song Save/Song Delete screen, select the
number that is displayed as “-----” (a number that
currently does not contain performance data).
3.
Save the performance data.
When saving is complete, the saved performance name
will be displayed.
Loading Performance Songs
Into the AT-80SL/60SL
To edit (p. 165) or re-record a performance song that is stored
on a floppy disk, you must first load that song into the
instrument.
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the performance
data into the disk drive.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Song Select>.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31_50
5.
Touch < >< > to select the performance data
that you wish to load into internal memory.
6.
Touch <Load>.
fig.07-32_50
The selected performance data will be loaded into
internal memory.
What is the SMF Format?
SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was
created to provide music files compatibility between
manufacturers.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 159 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
160
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
If the following screen appears
The message below is shown when the performance song in
the unit has not been saved to disk.
fig.E-62
If you wish to erase the performance song
1.
Touch the <OK> button.
If you wish to save the performance song on a
floppy disk
1.
Touch the <Cancel> button.
Save the song on a floppy disk (p. 158).
If loading is canceled because the memory limit has been
reached, the following message will be displayed:
fig.E-30
Deleting Performance Songs
Stored on Disk
You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a
floppy disk.
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the performance
data into the disk drive.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Save/Delete>.
The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.
fig.07-31_50
5.
Touch < >< > to select the performance data
that you wish to delete.
6.
Touch <Delete>.
The confirmation message appears.
fig.07-
If you touch <Cancel> the performance data will not be
deleted.
7.
When you touch <OK> the performance data will
be deleted.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 160 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
161
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Layering a New Recording
onto SMF Music Files
You can load commercially available SMF music files into the
AT-80SL/60SL, and record your own performance on top of
it. During recording, the data you’ve loaded will be played
back, while you record your performance.
1.
Insert a floppy disk containing commercially
available SMF music files into the floppy disk
drive.
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Song Select>.
The Song Select screen appears.
fig.07-31_50
5.
Touch < >< > to select the performance data
that you wish to load into internal memory.
6.
Touch <Load> (load performance data).
fig.07-32_50
The selected performance data will be loaded into
internal memory.
For track assignments of SMF format performance data
loaded to the AT-80SL/60SL, refer to p. 147.
7.
Select the panel settings needed for recording the
performance.
8.
Touch the <Bwd> button and <Fwd> button to
move to the measure at which you wish to begin
recording.
9.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Rec> to enter
recording-standby mode.
<Play> and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will
blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already
recorded will light.
Also, the panel Composer [Rec] button indicator will
light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.
You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the
Composer [Rec] button.
10.
Touch the Track button which you wish to
recording (button flashes).
11.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Play> to begin
recording.
As you record, the music file that was loaded into the
AT-80SL/60SL will play back.
12.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop
recording.
The track button for which performance data has been
recorded will be lit.
You can also start and stop recording by pressing the
Composer [Play/Stop] button.
The performance data you recorded can be saved on a floppy
disk (p. 158).
NOTE
Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into the
AT-80SL/60SL, but for reasons of copyright protection,
cannot be saved in SMF format.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 161 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
162
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Using Song with a Different
Tempo Than That of the
Performance Song
1.
Insert the floppy disk containing the performance
song whose tempo you want to change into the
disk drive.
2.
Load the performance data into the unit (p. 159).
3.
Determine the tempo with the Tempo [ ] [ ]
buttons.
4.
Hold down the panel [Reset] button and press the
[Rec] button.
NOTE
You cannot carry out this operation with the <Reset> and
<Rec> in the Rec/Play screen.
Re-Recording Part of Your
Performance
(Punch-in Recording)
After you have recorded a performance, you can re-record a
specified portion of the performance.
With this method, you listen to the recorded performance,
and re-record just the desired area. This recording method is
called “Punch-in Recording.”
To Specify the Segment to be Recorded Over
Again
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Punch In/Out>.
The Punch In/Out screen appears.
fig.07-
4.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which
recording will begin).
fig.07-
5.
Touch < >< > to specify “From” (the
measure at which recording will begin).
6.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures
that will be re-recorded).
7.
Touch < >< > to set “For” (the number of
measures that will be re-recorded).
8.
Touch <Rec>.
The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in
recording standby.
To Record While Listening to the Song
9.
Press the Track button which you wish to re-
record (indicator flashes).
10.
Touch <Play> to begin recording.
When you touch <Play>, the metronome will play two
measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.
When you reach the first measure of the specified area,
recording will begin. When the specified area ends,
recording will end, and playback will resume.
While the song is playing back or recording, the
Composer [Rec] button’s indicator will be lit as follows.
When recording has ended for the specified area and the
data is once again playing back, the [Rec] button’s
indicator will resume flashing.
11.
Touch <Stop> to stop the recording.
The indicator of the track button which recorded the
performance will light.
While the performance is
playing back
The Composer [Rec]
button’s indicator will
flash
While you are re-
recording
The Composer [Rec]
button’s indicator will
light constantly
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 162 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
163
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Recording and Layering
Drum Parts (Loop Recording)
You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the
rhythm part, adding additional notes at each pass. This type
of recording is called “Loop Recording.”
This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer
drum sounds individually for the Rhythm part.
NOTE
“Loop Recording” can be used only when recording the
Rhythm part.
1.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button or the [Manual
Perc] button to select a Drum Set or Sound Effect
Set (p. 56–p. 59).
2.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
3.
Touch the <Bwd> and <Fwd> on the Rec/Play
screen, move to the measure where you wish to
start Loop Recording.
4.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-
5.
Touch <Loop Rec>.
The Loop Rec screen appears.
fig.07-
6.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures
that will be recorded repeatedly).
fig.07-
To cancel operation, touch <Exit>.
7.
Touch < >< > to specify the “For” value (the
number of measures that will be recorded
repeatedly).
8.
Touch <Rec>.
The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in
recording standby.
9.
Touch <Play> to begin recording.
When you touch the <Play>, the metronome will play
two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.
You can record repeatedly over the specified range of
measures, adding additional notes at each pass.
10.
Touch <Stop> to stop playback.
The indicator of the Rhythm track button which
recorded the performance will light.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 163 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
164
Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play
Count-In Recording
This setting (ON/OFF) determines whether or not a
metronome count-in (2 measures) will be heard after
pressing the [Play/Stop] button on recording.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.07-04_50
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
fig.07-
3.
Touch <Options>.
fig.03-37_50
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Count-In Rec.
5.
Touch the Count-In Rec setting (ON/OFF) to
switch it between “ON/OFF.”
Each time you touch the Count-In Rec setting, it will
alternate between ON/OFF.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Description
ON
A two-measure count will sound before
recording
OFF
No count will sound before recording
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 164 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
165
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
Song files that you record can be edited using five different
functions.
The following editing functions are provided.
NOTE
Once you edit data, it cannot be restored to its original
condition. As a precaution against accidents, we recommend
that you save your song to a floppy disk before you edit it (p.
158).
Deleting a Specific Measure
(Delete Measure)
You can delete a portion of the performance data. This
function lets you delete specified measures (bars) of the song
from all tracks. When any part of the song file is deleted,
subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap.
Example: To delete measures (bars) 5–8
fig.08-01
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02_50
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to
open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03_50
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08_50
4.
Touch <Delete Measure>.
fig.08-04-2_50
The Delete Measure screen appears.
fig.08-04_50
Menu Descriptions Page
Delete Measure
Deleting a Specific Measure. p. 165
Delete Track
Delete the Recording from a
Track. p. 166
Erase Event
Erase Recording. p. 168
Copy
Copying Measures. p. 170
Quantize
Correct Timing Inaccuracies. p. 171
Rename
Change the name of the
performance data. p. 156
12345678910
123456
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 165 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
166
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
5.
Touch the “From” value (the first measure that
you wish to delete).
6.
Touch < >< > to set “From” (the first
measure that you wish to delete).
fig.08-05_50
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures
that you wish to delete).
9.
Touch < >< > to set “For” (the number of
measures that you wish to delete).
To delete to the last measure, select “ALL.”
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
12.
Touch <OK> to delete the measures.
When deletion has been completed, you are returned to
the Delete Measure screen.
Delete the Recording from a
Track (Delete Track)
The AT-80SL/60SL has seven tracks. This function lets you
delete the recording from a track that you specify.
For more on the content stored on each track, refer to p. 144.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02_50
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to
open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03_50
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08_50
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 166 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
167
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
4.
Touch <Delete Track>.
fig.08-08.eps_50
The Delete Track (delete the performance data of a track)
screen appears.
fig.08-08-2_50
5.
Touch the “Track” value (the track whose
performance data you wish to delete).
6.
Touch < >< > to select the “Track” (the
track whose performance data you wish to
delete).
fig.08-09_50
Settings:
RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER,
UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-06-2_50
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
9.
Touch <OK> to delete the performance data.
When the recording has been deleted, the Delete Track
screen will reappear.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 167 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
168
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
Erase Recording (Erase Event)
You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a
specified area without making the song shorter. This is called
the “Erase” function.
As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance
data in a specified area, you can erase the following contents
of the performance.
Example: Erasing measures (bars) 5–8
fig.08-10
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02_50
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to
open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03_50
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08_50
4.
Touch <Erase Event>.
fig.08-11-2_50
The Erase Event screen appears.
fig.08-11_50
5.
Touch the “Event” value (the type of performance
data that you wish to erase).
ALL
All recording
NOTE
Notes played on the keyboard
PANEL
Panel operations,
Content Saved to the Control Track
(Information Other than Expression,
Voice, and Tempo Data)
→
Refer to p. 144.
EXPRESSION
Expression pedal recording
VOICE
Voice settings
TEMPO
Tempo setting
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 168 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
169
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
6.
Touch < >< > to specify the “Event” (the
type of performance data that you wish to erase).
fig.08-12_50
Settings
ALL, NOTE, PANEL, EXPRESSION, VOICE,
TEMPO
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “Track” value (the track from which
data will be erased).
9.
Touch < >< > to specify the “Track” (the
track from which data will be erased).
If you have selected EXPRESSION, VOICE and TEMPO
as the type of recording to be erased, the Part selection
will not be available because the expression control
recording is common to all parts.
Settings
ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER,
UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL
If you select “ALL,” the recording will be erased from all
parts.
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which
erasure will begin).
12.
Touch < >< > to set “From” (the measure at
which erasure will begin).
13.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
14.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures
from which the data will be erased).
15.
Touch < >< > to set “For” (the number of
measures from which the data will be erased).
If you wish to erase to the last measure (bar), set “for:
ALL.”
16.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
17.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-06
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
18.
Touch <OK> to erase the performance data.
Once the performance data has been erased, you are
returned to the Erase Event screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 169 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
170
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
Copying Measures (Copy)
This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a
different measure (bar) location in the same track.
If a recording already exists at the copy destination, it will be
erased.
Example: To copy measures (bars) 5–7 to measure (bar) 8
fig.08-13
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02_50
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to
open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03_50
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08_50
4.
Touch <Copy>.
fig.08-14-2_50
The Copy screen appears.
fig.08-14_50
5.
Touch the “Track” value (the track to be copied).
6.
Touch < >< > to set “Track” (the track to be
copied).
fig.08-15-2_50
Settings:
ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER,
UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL
If you select “ALL,” the recording in all the tracks will be
copied.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which
copying will begin).
1234567
12345678910
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 170 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
171
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
9.
Touch < >< > to set “From” (the measure at
which copying will begin).
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures
to be copied).
12.
Touch < >< > to set “For” (the number of
measures to be copied).
If you want to specify all of the data up to the final
measure, select “ALL.”
13.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
14.
Touch the “To” value (the copy-destination
measure number).
15.
Touch < >< > to set “To” (the copy-
destination measure number).
If you select “END,” the data will be copied following
the end of the last measure.
16.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
17.
Touch the “Time” value (the number of times
that the data will be copied).
18.
Touch < >< > to set “Time” (the number of
times that the data will be copied).
19.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
20.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-06
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
21.
Touch <OK> to copy the measures.
Once the measures have been copied, you are returned
to the Copy screen.
Correct Timing Inaccuracies
(Quantize)
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded
performance by having the music be aligned with a timing
you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
For example even if you intend to play at quarter-note
timing, the notes may be slightly earlier or later than precise
quarter-note intervals. In this case, if you quantize at quarter-
note (1/4) timing, you can correctly match the rhythms.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
fig.08-02_50
2.
In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to
open the Utility screen.
fig.08-03_50
3.
In the Utility screen, touch <Edit>.
The Edit Menu screen appears.
fig.08-08_50
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 171 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
172
Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data
4.
Touch <Quantize>.
fig.08-17-2_50
The Quantize screen appears.
fig.08-17_50
5.
Touch the “Track” value (the track that will be
quantized).
6.
Touch < >< > to specify the “Track” (the
track that will be quantized).
fig.08-18_50
Settings
ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER,
UPPER, SOLO
If you select “ALL,” the recording in all the tracks will be
quantized.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
8.
Touch the “From” value (the measure at which
quantization will begin).
9.
Touch < >< > to set “From” (the measure at
which quantization will begin).
10.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
11.
Touch the “For” value (the number of measures
that will be quantized).
12.
Touch < >< > to set “For” (the number of
measures that will be quantized).
To specify everything through to the last measure, set
“for: ALL.”
13.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
14.
Touch the “Resolution” value (the resolution at
which notes will be aligned).
15.
Touch < >< > to set “Resolution” (the
resolution at which notes will be aligned).
The “Resolution” (the timing to which notes are aligned)
can be set to one of the following settings.
fig.08-20
16.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<Exit>.
17.
Touch <Execute>.
The following display appears.
fig.08-06
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
18.
Touch <OK> to have the quantization carried
out.
When the quantizing is finished, you are returned to the
Quantize screen.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 172 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
173
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms
You can edit some of the internal rhythms to create your own original
rhythms. These original rhythms are called “User rhythms.”
This function is
called “Rhythm Customize.”
Process for Creating User Rhythms
Creating the User Rhythm
Open the Rhythm Customize screen
Select the division
Load the source rhythm
Make the division settings
Edit the rhythm
Change the percussion
Save the User Rhythm to the User Memory or floppy disk.
• Copy User Rhythm on Floppy Disks to the User Memory
• Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the Floppy Disks
Saving the User Rhythm
Changing the name of a User Rhythm
Copying the User Rhythm
Preparations for Creating User Rhythms
Change the rhythm tempo
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 173 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
174
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
Preparations for Creating
User Rhythms
■
Displaying the Rhythm
Customize Screen
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
In the Rhythm screen, touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Customize>.
The Rhythm Customize screen appears.
When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen
When calling up a source.
4
8
10 11 12 13 14
9
6
5
75
21 3
1
Rhythm Name
2
Beat
3
Tempo
4
Division Name (p. 175)
5
button
Switches the page when the rhythm pattern is
displayed over multiple pages.
6
(Zoom Out/Zoom In) button
Expands (zooms in) and reduces (zooms out)
the rhythm pattern display.
7
Current location (Measure: Beat: Tick)
8
Instrument Name
Indicates the name of the instrument used in
the rhythm.
9
Rhythm Pattern Display
Displays the notes in the selected rhythm
pattern.
10
(Utility) button
Displays the menu with settings for the
Rhythm Customize function.
11
(Preview) button
Allows you to listen to the created rhythm.
12
(Delete) button
Deletes the rhythm in the displayed measure.
13
(Copy) button
Copies the rhythm in the displayed measure
and adds it to the end of that measure.
14
button
When more than eight different instruments
are used in a rhythm, press these buttons to
switch through the instrument names.
15
Scroll Bar
This indicates the position of the current
measure in the overall rhythm.
4
8
10 11 12 13 14
9
6
5
75
2115 3
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 174 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
175
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
■
Selecting the Division
What is the Division?
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,
melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.
With the AT-80SL/60SL, such changes in songs are allocated
to the following six performance states. We call these six
parts of a song “Divisions.”
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can
also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the
Divisions.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Div Select> (Division Select).
You can open the Division Select screen by touching the
Division name indication (p. 174) in the Rhythm Customize
screen.
4.
Touch a Division name to select the Division.
This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen. The
name of the selected division now appears in the
Rhythm Customize screen.
You can touch < > to hear how the rhythm
sounds.
Division Performance division
Intro The intro is played at the start of a song.
Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
Fill In To
Variation
This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where
the mood changes. It is used to make a song
more lively.
After the phrase is played, the variation’s
accompaniment pattern is played.
Variation This is a developmental accompaniment
pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
Fill In To
Original
This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where
the mood changes. It is used to make a song
more sedate.
After the phrase is played, the original’s
accompaniment pattern is played.
Ending This is played at the end of a song.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 175 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
176
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
■
Loading the Rhythm
Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the rhythm you
want to use as the base for the rhythm you are creating.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Load>.
The Rhythm Load screen appears.
4.
Touch a Rhythm group name.
The sub-window for selecting the rhythm group
appears.
5.
Touch a Rhythm group name on the sub-window
to select the Rhythm group.
The Rhythm Load screen reappears.
6.
Touch < >< > to switch the screen, then
touch a rhythm name to select the rhythm.
You can touch <Preview> to hear how the rhythm
sounds.
7.
Touch< >< > to select the Division you
want to call up.
Selecting “ALL” calls up all of the Divisions.
8.
Touch <Load>.
The rhythm is called up, and the Rhythm Customize
screen returns to the display.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 176 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
177
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
■
Making the Division Settings
Independent “Drum Set,” “Beat,” and “Volume” settings can
be made for each Division.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Div Options> (Division Options).
The Division Options screen appears.
Changing the Drum Set
4.
Touch the value set for Drum Set
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
The Division Options screen reappears.
Changing the Beat
7.
Touch the Beat setting.
8.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
9.
Touch <Exit>.
The Division Options screen reappears.
Changing the Volume
10.
Touch the Volume setting.
11.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 177 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
178
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
12.
Touch <Exit>.
The Division Options screen reappears.
■
Editing the Rhythm
Edit the internal rhythm.
Copying the Rhythm in a Selected
Measure
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch <Copy> (to copy the selected measure).
The following screen appears.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
3.
Touch <OK>.
Copies the rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it
to the end of that measure.
Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected
Measure
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch <Del> (to copy the selected measure).
The following screen appears.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
3.
Touch <OK>.
The selected measure is deleted.
What you can do Page
Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 178
Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p. 178
Erasing Sounds p. 179
Adding Sounds p. 179
Altering Voices p. 180
Changing the Velocity p. 180
Moving Sounds p. 180
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 178 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
179
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
Editing the Sounds
You can add and erase sounds, alter voices, and change the
velocity.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch the point on the screen where the sound
you want to edit is located.
When you touch the screen, a line appears at the point
you touch. By holding your finger to the screen and
moving it to the left or right, you can have the line move
along with your finger.
The information on the location (Measure: Beat: Tick) of
the line on the screen is displayed.
When you remove your finger from the screen, the Note
Edit screen opens, and the note positioned at the line in
the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed.
You can touch < > to open the Utility screen, and then
touch <Note Edit> in the Utility screen to open the Note Edit
screen.
Erasing Sounds
3.
Touch < >< > to select the point
where you want to delete the sound.
4.
When you touch <Erase>, the selected sound is
erased.
Adding Sounds
5.
Touch < >< > to select the point
where you want to add the sound.
6.
When you touch <Create>, the new sound is
added after the selected sound.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 179 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
180
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
Altering Voices
7.
Touch < >< > to select the sound
whose voice you want to change.
8.
Touch the Instrument name.
9.
Touch <-8><-1><+1><+8> to switch the voice.
Changing the Velocity
10.
Touch < >< > to select the sound
whose velocity you want to change.
11.
Touch the Velocity setting.
12.
Touch <-10><-1><+1><+10> to change the
velocity.
Moving Sounds
13.
Touch < >< > to select the sound
you want to move.
14.
Touch the “Meas Beat Tick” setting.
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as
the format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a
beat.
15.
Touch <-30><-1><+1><+30> to move the sound.
With the Rhythm Customize function, note locations are
expressed in terms of “Measure: Beat: Tick.” One tick is the
smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note, and
there are 120 ticks in a quarter note. Typical notes might be
indicated as shown below.
Quarter Note 8th Note
8th Note Triplet 16th Note
The ticks for each note have the following characteristics.
Quarter Note 0 (Every 120 ticks)
8th Note 0, 60 (Every 60 ticks)
8th Note Triplet 0, 40, 80 (Every 40 ticks)
16the Note 0, 30, 60, 90 (Every 30 ticks)
(1 measure: 1 beat: 0 tick)
1: 1: 0 1: 2: 0 1: 3: 0 1: 4: 0 2: 1: 0 2: 1: 60 2: 2: 0 2: 2: 60
1: 1: 0 1: 1: 40 1: 1: 80
3
1: 1: 0 1: 1: 30 1: 1: 60 1: 1: 90
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 180 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
181
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
■
Changing and Deleting the
Instruments Used
You can change an instrument used in a rhythm and replace
it with another instrument.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize
screen where the instrument names are displayed.
The Instrument Edit screen appears.
You can open Instrument Edit screen using the following
procedure
1.
Touch < > (Utility) in the Rhythm
Customize screen (p. 174).
The Utility screen appears.
2.
Touch <Inst Edit> (Instrument Edit).
The Instrument Edit screen appears.
hanging the Instrument Used
3.
Touch < >< > in the screen to select the
name of the instrument you want to change.
4.
Touch <Change>.
The following screen appears.
5.
Touch < >< > to switch the screen, then
touch the instrument name.
The following screen appears.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
6.
If you want to change the instrument, touch
<OK>.
The instrument is changed.
Deleting an Instrument
When an instrument is deleted, all of the sounds using that
instrument are deleted from the rhythm.
7.
Touch < >< > in the screen to select the name
of the instrument you want to delete.
8.
Touch <Delete> on the Instrument Edit screen.
9.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the
instrument, touch <OK>.
The selected instrument is deleted.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 181 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
182
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
■
Deleting Rhythms You Have
Created
This deletes User rhythms created by partially editing the
internal rhythms.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Clear>.
The following screen appears.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
4.
If you are sure that you wish to delete the rhythm,
touch <OK>.
■
Changing the Name of a User
Rhythm (Rename)
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Save>.
The Rhythm Save screen appears.
4.
Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
fig.07-25_50
5.
Touch the character select button ( )to
switch among uppercase/lowercase/symbols.
Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle
through the available choices, like this: uppercase
→
lowercase
→
symbols
→
uppercase...
6.
Touch the screen to specify the desired character.
The following characters can be selected.
To cancel operation, touch <Cancel>.
7.
When you’re done making the settings, touch
<OK>.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : = ? ^ _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Deletes a character.
Inserts a space (blank).
Move the cursor (the symbol that
indicates the location at which characters
will be input) to left or right.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 182 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
183
Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment
Rhythms
Saving User Rhythms to the
User Memory or Floppy Disk
You can take User rhythms created with the Rhythm
Customize function and save them in the AT-80SL/60SL’s
User memory and floppy disks. To call up rhythms saved in
User memory, press the [Disk/User] button.
1.
Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Save>.
The Rhythm Save screen appears.
4.
Touch < > (floppy disk) or
<> (User memory) to determine the
save destination.
5.
Touch < >< > to select the number of the
save destination.
Numbers which have not been used in the saving
operation will be displayed as “- - - - -.”
To cancel the save, touch the <Exit> to close the Rhythm
Save screen.
You can change the name of a rhythm by touching
<Rename>.
6.
Touch <Save>.
The User rhythms are saved to the User memory or to
floppy disks.
You can save rhythms after changing the tempo by touching
the Tempo [ ] [ ] button.
If the following screen appears
The following screen appears if you select a number to which
a rhythm has already been saved and then touch <Save>.
If you wish to overwrite the rhythm
1.
Touch <OK>.
The Rhythm will be rewritten.
If you wish to save new data instead of
updating the rhythm
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled.
2.
In the Rhythm Save screen, select the number that
is displayed as “-----” (a number that currently
does not contain rhythm data).
3.
Save the Rhythm.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 183 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
184
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
Adjusting How the
Instrument Responds
■
Turning Aftertouch On/Off
This switches the aftertouch setting for the Upper keyboard.
Aftertouch applies vibrato when additional pressure is
placed on the keys that are being played.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <UPPER>.
The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the After Touch.
4.
Touch the After Touch setting to switch between
“ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the After Touch setting, it will
alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
Settings
ON, OFF
5.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
Please note that not all the voices on the Upper keyboard are
responsive to Aftertouch, even if the feature is set to ON (p.
220).
■
Adjusting the Depth of
Aftertouch
This adjusts the depth of the Aftertouch effect.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <UPPER>.
The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the After Touch
Sensitivity.
4.
Touch the After Touch Sensitivity value (1–10).
5.
Touch < >< > to edit the value.
Setting
1–10
Higher settings of this value will allow deeper vibrato to
be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
Aftertouch can only be enabled for the Upper keyboard.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 184 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
185
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Adjusting the Initial Touch
Sensitivity
Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in
playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of
volume. This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect
applied.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch either <UPPER>, or <LOWER>.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Initial Touch.
4.
Touch the Initial Touch value (OFF, 1–10).
Setting
OFF, 1–10
5.
Touch <Exit>.
■
Changing the Pedalboard
Polyphony
You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous
multiple notes or single notes only.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <PEDAL>.
The Pedalboard screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the PedalBass
Mode.
4.
Touch the PedalBass Mode setting to switch
between “MONOPHONIC” and
“POLYPHONIC.”
Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting, it will
alternate between “MONOPHONIC” and
“POLYPHONIC.”
5.
Touch <Exit>.
UPPER
To change the initial touch setting of
the Upper part
LOWER
To change the initial touch setting of
the Lower part
Setting Descriptions
1–10
Initial Touch is on.
The harder you play the key, the higher
the volume.
The change in volume when the keys
are played forcefully increases as the
value is increased.
OFF
Initial Touch is off.
Volume remains constant regardless of
how hard you play.
Setting Descriptions
MONOPHONIC
Only single notes can be played.
POLYPHONIC
Multiple notes can be played.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 185 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
186
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
Performance Function
Settings
■
Selecting the Range of Keys to
Which the Damper Pedal will
Apply
You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you
press the Damper (Sustain) pedal.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Damper Pedal.
4.
Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch
between “to UPPER” and “to LOWER.”
Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting, it will
alternate between “to UPPER” and “to LOWER.”
5.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
If the voice is a percussive voice (such as a Piano voice), the
tone will be sustained, but fade away just like an acoustic
piano. If the voice is a non-percussive instrument (such as a
String voice), the tone will be sustained as long as the pedal
is depressed.
■
Changing the Function of the
Expression Pedal
Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your
performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files
are being played back.
Function During Recording
Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be
recorded or not while your performance is being recorded.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Exp. Src (Rec).
4.
Touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting to switch
between “PEDAL” and “COMPOSER.”
Each time you touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting, it will
alternate between “PEDAL” and “COMPOSER.”
5.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
to UPPER
The effect is applied to the voices played
on the Upper keyboard.
to LOWER
The effect is applied to the voices played
on the Lower keyboard.
Setting Descriptions
PEDAL
Expression Pedal movements will be
recorded. The previous recording will
be erased as new songs are recorded.
COMPOSER
Expression Pedal movements will not
be recorded. The previous data will
remain without being erased.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 186 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
187
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
Function During Playback
You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will
function while ATELIER song files are being played back.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Exp. Src (Play).
4.
Touch the Exp. Src (Play) setting.
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
■
Selecting the Range of Keys to
Which the Pitch Bend/Vibrato
Lever will Apply
This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by
the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever.
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Bender/Vibrato.
4.
Touch the Bender/Vibrato setting.
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
PEDAL
+COMPOSER
The Expression Pedal will function.
Expression Pedal recording within
the song file will also be effective.
COMPOSER
The Expression Pedal will not
function. The Expression Pedal
recording within the song file will be
effective.
PEDAL
The Expression Pedal will function.
The Expression Pedal recording
within the song file will be ignored.
Setting Descriptions
to UPPER
The effect is applied to the voices played
on the Upper keyboard.
to LOWER
The effect is applied to the voices played
on the Lower keyboard.
to PEDAL
The effect is applied to the voices played
on the Pedalboard.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 187 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
188
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Changing the Pitch Bend
Range
This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of
Pitch change (range) permissible when using Pitch Bend. The
range can be set anywhere between 1–12 (in semitone units;
with a maximum of one octave).
1.
Touch <Sound/Kbd> on the Main screen.
The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
2.
Touch <Controller>.
The Controller screen appears.
3.
Touch < >< > to display the Pitch Bend
Range.
4.
Touch the Pitch Bend Range setting.
5.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
Settings
1–12 (semitone steps)
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
Drums/SFX is fixed at one octave range, regardless of this
setting.
Rhythm Settings
■
Turning Chord Hold On/Off
The Chord Hold function can be switched ON/OFF. When
Chord Hold is ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will
continue playing even when you lift your hand from the
keyboard to play a new chord.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Chord Hold.
5.
Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch between
“ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting, it will
alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
ON
The Automatic Accompaniment
determined by the chord played on the
Lower keyboard is held (even if you
release the keys).
OFF
When you release the keys that you
played in the Lower keyboard, the
Automatic Accompaniment will stop
(be muted). Only the Rhythm (drum)
performance will continue.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 188 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
189
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Count Down Sound
You can change the sound that is used for the count played at
the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function (p.
68).
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Count Down
Sound.
5.
Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch
between “VOICE” and “STICK.”
Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting, it
will alternate between “VOICE” and “STICK.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
■
Preventing Rhythm Tempos
from Switching Automatically
You can prevent rhythm tempos from switching
automatically when you switch rhythms.
1.
Touch <Rhythm> on the Main screen.
The Rhythm screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rhythm Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Auto Std Tempo
(Auto Standard Tempo).
5.
Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch
between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting, it will
alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
Setting Descriptions
VOICE
Human voice count (One, two, three...)
STICK
Stick sound count
Setting Descriptions
ON
Switching the rhythm while the rhythm
is stopped automatically changes the
tempo settings to those in the new
rhythm.
OFF
The tempo settings are not changed
automatically when the rhythms are
changed.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 189 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
190
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
Registration Settings
■
Changing the Timing at Which
Arranger Settings are Recalled
You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm
performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be
recalled when you press a Registration button.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
2.
Touch <Load>.
The Registration Load screen appears.
3.
Touch <Utility>.
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Options>.
The Registration Options screen appears.
5.
Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch
between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will
alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Changing the Timing at Which
Transposition Settings are
Recalled
You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled
when you press a Registration button.
1.
Touch <Registration> on the Main screen.
The sub-window appears.
2.
Touch <Load>.
The Registration Load screen appears.
3.
Touch <Utility>.
The Utility screen appears.
4.
Touch <Options>.
The Registration Options screen appears.
5.
Touch the Trans. Update (Transpose Update)
setting to switch between “DELAYED” and
“INSTANT.”
Each time you touch the Trans. Update setting, it will
alternate between “DELAYED” and “INSTANT.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
Setting Descriptions
DELAYED
Settings related to Rhythm
performances and Automatic
Accompaniment will be recalled when
you hold a Registration button for
several seconds. If you quickly press the
Registration button, only the panel
settings (voice, etc.) that are not related
to Rhythm and Automatic
Accompaniment will be updated.
INSTANT
Settings related to Rhythm
performances and Automatic
Accompaniment will be recalled the
instant you press a button along with all
other panel settings.
Setting Descriptions
DELAYED
Transpose settings will be recalled
when you hold a Registration button for
several seconds.
INSTANT
Transpose setting will be recalled the
instant you press a button along with all
other panel settings.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 190 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
191
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
Composer settings
■
Switching the Display of Lyrics
On or Off
Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can
be displayed on the screen. You can turn on or off the lyrics
display of such music files.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Lyric.
5.
Touch the Lyric setting to switch between “ON”
and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Lyric setting, it will alternate
between “ON” and “OFF.”
6.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
If you press a voice select button while playing back music
files that contains lyrics, the display screen will switch, and
the lyrics will no longer be displayed. To re-display the
lyrics, touch <Play> on Rec/Play screen once again.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Changing the Key When
Playing Back Songs
(Play Transpose)
SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded
can be transposed for playback.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Play Transpose.
5.
Touch the Play Transpose setting.
6.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
The key is transposed by one semitone each time the
<> or < > key is touched.
Settings
-24 – +24 (semitone steps)
7.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
ON
Lyrics will be displayed
OFF
Lyrics will not be displayed
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 191 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
192
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Changing the Metronome
Setting
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Metronome.
5.
Touch the Metronome setting.
6.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
■
Adjusting the Metronome
Volume
You can adjust the volume of the metronome.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Metronome Vol.
(Metronome Volume).
5.
Touch Metronome Vol. setting.
6.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
Settings
1–10
Increasing the value will raise the volume of the
metronome.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
OFF
Not heard at all
REC
Heard only while recording
ON
Heard constantly
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 192 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
193
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Changing the Sound of the
Metronome
You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Metronome
Sound.
5.
Touch the Metronome Sound setting.
6.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Setting the Beat
This setting determines the beat to be used when recording
performance songs.
1.
Touch <Rec/Play> on the Main screen.
The Rec/Play screen appears.
2.
Touch < > (Utility).
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Options>.
The Rec/Play Options screen appears.
4.
Touch < >< > to display the Beat.
5.
Touch the Beat setting.
The time signature setting screen appears.
6.
Touch the time signature that you wish to set.
7.
Touch <Exit>.
When recording Rhythm performances or Automatic
Accompaniment, the beat is set automatically.
NOTE
You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs.
Setting Descriptions
CLICK&BELL
Conventional metronome sound
ELECTRONIC
Electronic metronome sound
VOICE ENG.
Human voice (English)
VOICE JPN.
Human voice (Japanese)
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 193 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
194
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
Other Settings
■
Adjust the Standard Pitch
(Master Tune)
The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as
the pitch of the middle A note. The “Master Tune” parameter
lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other
instruments that are playing together with the AT-80SL/
60SL.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Master Tune.
3.
Touch the Master Tune setting.
4.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
Settings
415.3Hz–466.2Hz (0.1 Hz units)
5.
Touch <Exit>.
By touching < >, you can restore the default setting
(440.0 Hz).
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Mic Echo
You can adjust the Mic echo.
Connecting the Microphone (p. 22)
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Mic Echo.
3.
Touch the Mic Echo setting.
4.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
Settings
0–12
5.
Touch <Exit>.
By touching < >, you can restore the default setting (4).
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 194 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
195
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Enabling Transmission of PC
Numbers
Transmission of PC (Program Change) numbers can be
switched ON/OFF when a Registration is selected.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Send PC Switch.
3.
Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch
between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting, it will
alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
4.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Setting the PC Number
You can specify the Program Change number that will be
transmitted from MIDI Out when a Registration is selected.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Bank MSB
(Bank Select MSB), Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB),
or PC Number (Program Change Number).
3.
Touch either <Bank MSB> (Bank Select MSB),
<Bank LSB> (Bank Select LSB), or <PC Number>
(Program Change Number) setting.
4.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
ON
PC numbers are transmitted
OFF
PC numbers are not transmitted
Menu Setting
Bank MSB
0–127
Bank LSB
0–127
PC Number
1–128
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 195 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
196
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
MIDI IN Mode
This instrument contains two sound generators: one for
GM2/GS data playback and one for keyboard performance.
Normally, data received at the MIDI In connector will control
only the sound generator for GM2/GS data playback.
However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting, you can
also control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the MIDI IN Mode.
3.
Touch the MIDI IN Mode setting to switch
between “MODE 1” and “MODE 2.”
Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting, it will
alternate between “Mode 1” and “Mode 2.”
* When the pedal part button is ON, data received at the MIDI
In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound
generator. When the pedal part button is OFF, data received at
the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
There are limitations on the types of MIDI messages that can
be received by the keyboard sound source. For details refer
to the “MIDI IMPLEMENTATION” (sold separately).
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Selecting the MIDI Transmit
Channel
When you use the MIDI connectors or the computer
connector of the AT-80SL/60SL to transmit musical data to
external devices, for each keyboard (Upper, Lower, and
Pedal) you can specify the channel on which your playing
will be transmitted as MIDI messages.
For details refer to p. 208.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
MODE 1
Control the instrument as a GS sound
generator
MODE 2
Channels 5 through 10 and Channels 12, 14,
15 are transmitted to the GS sound
generator, and all other channels are
transmitted to the keyboard sound
generator.
Channel MODE 1 MODE 2
1GS Solo
2 GS Pedal/GS *
3 GS Lower
4 GS Upper
5–10 GS GS
11 GS Drum/SFX
12 GS GS
13 GS Manual Percussion
14–15 GS GS
16 GS Control
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 196 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
197
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
2.
Touch <Tx MIDI Ch. Upper>, <Tx MIDI Ch.
Lower>, <Tx MIDI Ch. Pedal>, <Tx MIDI Ch.
Solo>, <Tx MIDI Ch. Drums>, <Tx MIDI Ch.
M.Perc> or <Tx MIDI Ch. Cntrl> (Tx MIDI Ch.
Control).
The Control part transmits Expression pedal data and
PC numbers.
3.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
Channel
1–16
4.
Touch <Exit>.
NOTE
MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only
when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.
■
Repositioning the Touch Screen
If you’ve been using the Touch Screen for some time, the
pointer may be shifted, making the AT-80SL/60SL react
incorrectly. You should correct this displacement when
necessary by performing calibration (repositioning).
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
The Utility screen appears.
3.
Touch <Touch Screen>.
A display will ask for confirmation.
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.
4.
Touch <OK> on the screen.
5.
Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.
NOTE
Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer
accurately. If the following display appears, perform the
touch panel position adjustment once again.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 197 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
198
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Displaying a Graphic at
Power-up (AT-80SL)
The AT-80SL allows you to load a favorite graphic into
internal memory, and have it be displayed when the power is
turned on.
1.
Use your computer to create a graphic image file
that meets the following criteria:
2.
Use your computer to save the graphic image file
on a DOS format floppy disk.
3.
Insert the floppy disk containing the graphic
image file into the floppy disk drive of the AT-
80SL.
4.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
5.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
6.
Touch <BMP Installer>.
The BMP Installer screen appears.
The AT-80SL can store up to three images. If two or more
images are stored in internal memory, those images will be
displayed consecutively after the power is turned on.
7.
In the screen, touch <01>–<03> to select the
destination at which the image is to be saved.
fig.
8.
Touch <Load...>.
The BMP Load screen appears.
The name of images saved on the floppy disk will be
displayed.
Size 320 x 240 pixels
Color 8 bit (256 colors)
Format image saved in BMP format
Name 1–8 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A
filename extension of “.BMP” (uppercase
characters) must be added after the name.
The following characters can be used to
name an image.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s
t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ‘ ( ) -
@ ~ { } ^ _ !
NOTE
If you use a character that cannot be used
in a name, it will be replaced by another
character when displayed.
Display Explanation
01–03
Images stored in internal memory
View
View an image stored in internal memory.
Load...
Load an image from floppy disk into
internal memory.
Clear...
Delete an image from internal memory.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 198 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
199
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
9.
Touch < >< > to select the image that you
want to load into internal memory.
You can touch <View> to verify the image.
10.
Touch <OK>.
The image will be loaded.
NOTE
If an image is already stored at the load destination, the
following screen will appear.
To erase the currently loaded image, and load
the new image
1.
Touch <OK>.
To cancel image loading
1.
Touch <Cancel>.
NOTE
If the image cannot be loaded, the following screen will
appear.
■
Deleting an Image Stored in
Internal Memory
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
In the System screen, touch <Utility>.
3.
Touch <BMP Installer>.
The BMP Installer screen appears.
4.
In the screen, touch <01>–<03> to select the
destination at which the image is to be saved.
You can touch <View> to verify the image.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 199 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
200
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
5.
Touch <Clear...>.
The following screen appears.
To cancel without deleting the image, touch <Cancel>.
6.
Touch <OK>.
The image will be deleted.
■
Switching the Background of
the Main Screen
You can change the color and pattern for the main
screen’s background.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Main
Background.
3.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
4.
Touch <Exit>.
The System screen appears.
5.
Touch <Exit> on the System Screen.
The main screen appears with the selected background.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 200 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
201
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
■
Eliminating the Bouncing Ball
from the Main Screen
You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball
does not appear.
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Main Bouncing
Ball.
3.
Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch
between “ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Main Boucing Ball setting, it
will alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
4.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
■
Using the V-LINK function
Connecting the AT-80SL/60SL to a V-LINK compatible
image device allows you to control the images with the AT-
80SL/60SL.
V-LINK
V-LINK ( ) is functionality promoted by Roland
that allows linked performance of music and visual material.
By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects
can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive
elements of a performance.
How to Use the V-LINK
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the V-LINK.
3.
Touch the V-LINK setting.
4.
Touch < >< > to change the setting.
5.
Touch <Exit>.
Setting Descriptions
ON
The bouncing ball appears in the main
screen.
OFF
The bouncing ball does not appear in
the main screen.
Setting Descriptions
OFF
The V-LINK function is switched off.
MODE 1
The V-LINK function is switched on.
You can now control the video images
using the Registration buttons.
MODE 2
The V-LINK function is switched on.
You can now control the video images
using the twelve keys at the very right of
the lower keyboard and Registration
buttons.
No sound is produced when you press
any of the twelve keys at the right end of
the keyboard.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 201 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
202
Chapter 10 Various Other Settings
The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon
appears in the main screen.
The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to ON
when V-LINK is on (MODE 1, MODE 2). When the V-LINK
function is switched off, the Send PC Switch setting reverts to
the setting in effect before V-LINK was switched on.
NOTE
For more on switching video images, refer to the owner’s
manual for the connected device.
You can also use the following procedure to turn the V-LINK
function on.
1.
Hold down the Composer [Reset] button and
press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or
the Upper Organ [Full 2] button.
Holding down the Composer [Reset] button and
pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the
instrument to “MODE 1” (p. 201). Holding down the
Composer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ
[Full 2] button switches the instrument to “MODE 2” (p.
201).
The display changes as shown below, and the AT-80SL/
60SL switches to Image Control mode.
The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon
appears in the main screen.
2.
To cancel the V-LINK function, once again hold
down the Composer [Reset] button and press
either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the
Upper Organ [Full 2] button.
If set to “MODE 1” (p. 201), holding down the Composer
[Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1]
button switches the V-LINK function off. If set to
“MODE 2” (p. 201), holding down the Composer [Reset]
button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button
switches the V-LINK function off.
NOTE
The MIDI transmit channel used for video control
messages is fixed at channel 16.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 202 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
203
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-80SL)
The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.
1.
Illumination Switch
→
p. 22
2.
Phones Jack
→
p. 21
3.
Mic Volume Knob
→
p. 22
4.
Mic In Jack
→
p. 22
5.
LCD Contrast Knob
Adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
6.
Computer Connector
You can connect a computer to the AT-80SL and
exchange performance data between the two.
7.
Computer Switch
Set this switch to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the
type computer that’s connected. Additionally, this
switches between MIDI In connector and the Computer
connector.
8.
MIDI In/Out Connectors
You can connect external MIDI devices to the AT-80SL
and exchange performance data between them.
9.
Video Out Jack
You can connect a TV to display lyrics.
10.
Input switch
→
p. 205
11.
Input L(mono)/R Jacks
Using this jack, you can connect other sound generating
devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other
devices through the AT-80SL’s speaker.
12.
Output L(mono)/R Jacks
You can some sounds if you connect speakers or other
audio equipment to these jacks. You can also hook up a
cassette recorder to record your performances.
13.
Aux Out L(mono)/R
You can connect an external speaker or a reverb unit to
obtain a more spacious reverb.
Computer
PC-1
Mac
PC-2MIDI
Out In
MIDI Video
Out
L(mono) R
Input
Normal
RSS
L(mono) R
Aux
L(mono) R
Main
Output
Illumination Contrast
LCD
Phones
Max
Min
Mic
Volume InOn
1
69 1087
2 43 5
1311 12
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 203 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
204
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-60SL)
The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.
1.
Phones Jack
→
p. 21
2.
Mic Volume Knob
→
p. 22
3.
Mic In Jack
→
p. 22
4.
LCD Contrast Knob
Adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
5.
Computer Connector
You can connect a computer to the AT-60SL and
exchange performance data between the two.
6.
Computer Switch
Set this switch to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the
type computer that’s connected. Additionally, this
switches between MIDI In connector and the Computer
connector.
7.
MIDI In/Out Connectors
You can connect external MIDI devices to the AT-60SL
and exchange performance data between them.
8.
Input switch
→
p. 205
9.
Input L(mono)/R Jacks
Using this jack, you can connect other sound generating
devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other
devices through the AT-60SL’s speaker.
10.
Output L(mono)/R Jacks
You can some sounds if you connect speakers or other
audio equipment to these jacks. You can also hook up a
cassette recorder to record your performances.
Computer
PC-1
Mac
PC-2MIDI
Out In
MIDI
L(mono) R
Input
Normal
RSS
L(mono) R
Output
Contrast
LCD
Phones
Max
Min
Mic
Volume In
5 76 8
1 32 4
9 10
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 204 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
205
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Connecting to Audio
Equipment
When you connect the AT-80SL/60SL to audio equipment,
you can play the sounds from the AT-80SL/60SL through the
speakers on the audio equipment or record your
performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.
When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard
phone plug, such as the PCS-100PW (sold separately). When
purchasing an audio cable, please consult the vendor where
you bought the AT-80SL/60SL.
Connectors
Output Jacks
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
separately) and play the sounds from the AT-80SL/60SL
through the speakers on the connected equipment or record
your performances on a tape recorder or other recording
device.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
AT-80SL
fig.
AT-60SL
fig.
Input Jacks
You can connect another sound module, such as audio
equipment or an electronic instrument using audio cables
(sold separately) and play the sounds from the connected
device through the speakers on the AT-80SL/60SL.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
fig.
When using the Input jacks to play the sound from an
external device through the speakers of the AT-80SL/60SL,
you can apply the internal RSS reverb of the AT-80SL/60SL
(p. 210).
If the Input switch is set to “RSS,” you can use the AT-80SL/
60SL’s [Master Volume] slider to adjust the volume of the
external device.
If the Input switch is set to “RSS,” RSS reverb will also be
applied to the sound of the microphone. In this case, use the
[Mic Volume] bnob to adjust the microphone volume.
Making the Connections
When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in
the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order
given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers
or other equipment.
Playing Sounds from the AT-80SL/60SL
Through the Speakers on Audio Equipment or
Recording Your Performances on a Recording
Device
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the AT-
80SL/60SL and on the device you’re about to
connect.
2.
Turn off the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and
other connected equipment.
3.
Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
4.
Switch on the AT-80SL/60SL.
L(mono) R
Aux
L(mono) R
Main
Output
L(mono) R
Output
Input switch
position Effect
Normal
The sound of the external device will be
heard without modification.
RSS
The RSS reverb of the AT-80SL/60SL
will be applied to the external device.
L(mono) R
Input
Normal
RSS
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 205 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
206
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
5.
Switch on the connected device.
6.
Adjust the volume level on the AT-80SL/60SL and
the connected device.
Recording AT-80SL/60SL Performances on a
Recording Device
7.
Start recording with the connected device.
8.
Play the keyboard.
9.
When the performance ends, stop recording on
the connected equipment.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the AT-
80SL/60SL and on the device you’re about to
connect.
2.
Turn off the connected equipment.
3.
Turn off the AT-80SL/60SL.
Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the
Speakers on the AT-80SL/60SL
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the AT-
80SL/60SL and on the device you’re about to
connect.
2.
Turn off the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and
other connected equipment.
3.
Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
4.
Turn on the connected equipment.
5.
Turn on the AT-80SL/60SL.
6.
Adjust the volume level on the AT-80SL/60SL and
the connected device.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the AT-
80SL/60SL and on the device you’re about to
connect.
2.
Turn off the AT-80SL/60SL.
3.
Turn off the connected equipment.
Connecting a Computer
By connecting this to the serial port of your computer, you
can transmit and receive musical data.
Connectors
fig.09-
Computer Connector
You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange
performance data.
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to make the
connection.
The type of cable required will depend on your computer.
Computer Switch
The setting for this switch is made depending on the
computer connected- Mac/PC-1/PC-2.
When this switch is set to MIDI, this connector cannot be
used.
Making the Connections
NOTE
When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in
the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order
given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers
or other equipment.
1.
Turn off the AT-80SL/60SL and the computer.
2.
Using a compatible computer cable (sold
separately), connect the Computer connector on
the bottom of the keyboard with the computer’s
serial port.
3.
Set the computer switch on the underside of the
keyboard to match the type of computer
connected.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
NOTE
Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the
power to the unit is off.
Computer
PC-1
Mac
PC-2MIDI
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 206 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
207
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
4.
Turn on the computer.
5.
Turn on the AT-80SL/60SL.
6.
Make the settings for baud rate (transmission
speed) for the computer and the software.
For more information on this procedure, please refer to the
owner’s manual for your computer.
7.
You should also make the settings for the MIDI
send channel as needed (p. 174).
Connection Examples:
Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the AT-80SL/60SL to the modem
port (or printer port) on the Apple Macintosh. Set the
Computer switch to “Mac.”
When using the Macintosh “Patch Bay” utility, specify 1
MHz as the Interface Type (MIDI Interface Clock).
Connection with an IBM PC
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the AT-80SL/60SL to the COM1 or
COM2 serial port on the IBM PC. Set the Computer switch to
“PC-2.”
■
Connecting a MIDI Devices
You can connect between your computer and the MIDI
connector of the AT-80SL/60SL using a Roland UM-1 or
similar USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately).
If the AT-80SL/60SL is connected to a computer in which
sequencer software such as Roland’s “Visual MT” is
installed, a song you’ve recorded on the AT-80SL/60SL can
be saved on your computer.
* In order to make connections to your computer, you must
install “MIDI driver” software on your computer. For details,
refer to the owner’s manual for your MIDI interface.
Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB
connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of
the AT-80SL/60SL.
Set the Computer switch on the AT-80SL/60SL’s bottom
panel to “MIDI,” then turn on the power to the AT-
80SL/60SL.
Apple Macintosh
Macintosh IIci
Modem Port
Computer cable (sold separately)
Computer
PC-1
Mac
PC-2MIDI
RS-232C
IBM PC/AT
Computer cable (sold separately)
Computer
PC-1
Mac
PC-2MIDI
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 207 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
208
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Connecting MIDI Devices
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
performance data, you can control the performances on one
device from the other. For instance, you can output sound
from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other
instrument.
What’s MIDI?
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was
developed as a standard for the exchange of performance
data between electronic instruments and computers.
The AT-80SL/60SL is equipped with MIDI connectors and a
Computer connector to let it exchange performance data
with external devices. These connectors can be used to
connect the AT-80SL/60SL to an external device for even
greater versatility.
About MIDI Connectors
The AT-80SL/60SL has two kinds of MIDI connectors.
Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI
instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to
control each other.
For instance, you can output sound from the other
instrument or switch tones on the other instrument.
You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed.
fig.
MIDI Out Connector
Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector
with an optional MIDI cable. The notes played on the
keyboard, movements of the Damper pedal, Expression data,
data indicating that a Registration button, etc., was pressed
will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector. The Solo
voice will be transmitted only if the Solo [To Lower] button is
ON.
MIDI In Connector
Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector
with an optional MIDI cable. Performance messages from an
external MIDI device are received here.
These incoming messages may instruct the receiving MIDI
instrument to play sounds or switch voices.
The AT-80SL/60SL contains two sound generators: one
sound generator for its own keyboards and one GS sound
generator (p. 250). Normally, musical data transmitted from
an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the GS
sound generator, but you can also set the “MIDI IN Mode”
parameter (p. 196) so that the keyboard sound generator is
controlled.
Making the Connections
NOTE
When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in
the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order
given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers
or other equipment.
1.
Turn the volume all the way down on the AT-
80SL/60SL and on the device you’re about to
connect.
2.
Switch off the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and the
device you’re about to connect.
3.
Set the Computer switch on the bottom of the
unit to “MIDI.”
4.
Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the
MIDI connectors to each other.
5.
Switch on the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and the
connected device.
6.
Adjust the volume level on the AT-80SL/60SL and
the connected device.
7.
You should also set the MIDI send channel as
needed.
A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also
available. It provides complete details concerning the way
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should
require this publication (such as when you intend to carry
out byte-level programming), please contact the nearest
Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor.
Out In
MIDI
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 208 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
209
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Connecting a Television to
View the Lyrics (AT-80SL)
You can connect a television to view the lyrics from SMF
music files.
Making the Connections
NOTE
When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in
the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order
given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers
or other equipment.
1.
Switch off the power to the AT-80SL and
television.
2.
Connect the AT-80SL’s Video Out connector to
the video input connector on the television with
an optional video cable.
3.
Switch on the television.
4.
Turn on the AT-80SL.
5.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
6.
Touch < >< > to display the Video Out.
7.
Touch the Video Out setting to select “ON.”
Each time you touch the Video Out setting, it will
alternate between “ON” and “OFF.”
8.
Touch <Exit>.
9.
Play back the music files with lyric (p. 145).
The lyric appears on the display.
NOTE
If lyric will be not displayed on the screen, please switch the
TV format.
■
Switching the TV Format
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the TV Format.
3.
Touch the TV Format setting to switch between
“PAL” and “NTSC.”
Each time you touch the TV Format setting, it will
alternate between “PAL” and “NTSC.”
Settings:
PAL, NTSC
4.
Touch <Exit>.
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 209 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
210
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Connecting External
Speakers or an external
Reverb Unit to Broaden the
Reverb
(RSS Reverb) (AT-80SL)
The AT-80SL has an Aux Out jack on the bottom of the
instrument.
By using this Aux Out jack to connect external speakers, you
can sound the reverb (reverberation) from the speakers. An
external reverb unit can also be connected and used to apply
reverb.
■
Switching the Aux Out On/OFF
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Aux Out.
3.
Touch the Aux Out setting to switch between
“ON” and “OFF.”
Each time you touch the Aux Out setting, it will alternate
between “ON” and “OFF.”
4.
Touch <Exit>.
■
Switching the Aux Out Mode
1.
Touch <System> on the Main screen.
The System screen appears.
2.
Touch < >< > to display the Aux Out Mode.
3.
Touch the Aux Out Mode setting to switch
between “AMBIENCE” and “TO EFFECTOR.”
Each time you touch the Aux Out Mode setting, it will
alternate between “AMBIENCE” and “TO EFFECTOR.”
4.
Touch <Exit>.
You can change the depth of Reverb for each part (p. 133).
This setting remains stored in memory even while power is
turned off.
AMBIENCE
The reverb sound applied by the
ATELIER will be output.
TO
EFFECTOR
The direct sound is output for
applying reverb.
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Harmony Intelligence
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 210 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
211
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Powered Speaker
Audio Set
AT-80SLAT-80SL
AUX Output
Input
Rear L Rear R
AUX Output
Aux Out :
Aux Out Mode:
ON
AMBIENCE
Aux Out :
Aux Out Mode:
ON
AMBIENCE
Aux Out :
Aux Out Mode:
ON
AMBIENCE
Rear Speaker R
Front Speaker R
Rear Speaker L
Front Speaker L
Amplifire
Amplifire
AT-80SL
Main Output AUX Output
1. Easy System
The RSS reverb plays when a stereo set is
connected.
3. System for Small Hall/Midsized Hall
The RSS reverb is played when front and rear speakers are set up.
2. Regular System
The RSS reverb is played when rear speakers
are set up.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 211 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
212
Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device
Aux Out :
Aux Out Mode:
ON
TO EFFECTOR
Side Speaker R
Front Speaker R
Side Speaker L
Rear Speaker RRear Speaker L
Front Speaker L
Amplifire
Amplifire
Amplifire
AT-80SL
Main Output
Line Input
Front Output Rear Output
AUX Output
RSS Ambience System
(Roland RSS-303)
USER PROGRAM
3MUTE12
POWER
TIME LEVELROOM WALL
EXIT(PUSH )
VALUE
S3S1 S4S2
F4F2F1 F3
AUX
MIN MINMAX MAX MAX
LINE
INPUT LEVEL LOW-FREQ OUTPUT
ROLL-OFF
6dB 12dB
40Hz
FREQ
MIN
LEVEL
700Hz
SETUP/ CHECK
MEMORY CARD
PLEASE INSERT THE CARD WITH THE GOLD CONTACTS DOWNWARD.
* For instructions on how to set the RSS-303,
refer to the RSS-303 Owner’s Manual.
4. System for Large Hall
The RSS reverb is played when front, rear, and side speakers are set up.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 212 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
213
Troubleshooting
If the AT-80SL/60SL does not function in the way you except, first check the following chart. If this does
not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.
Problem Check Solution Page
When you press the [Power
On] switch, the power doesn’t
come on.
Power cord is not connected
correctly.
Connect the power cord correctly.
p. 20
No sound is heard.
The [Master Volume] slider is set too
low.
Turn the [Master Volume] knob
toward “Max.”
p. 20
Headphones are connected.
When you connect the headphones,
the sound is heard only through the
headphones.
If you want sound to be output from
the speakers, disconnect the
headphones.
p. 21
The plug is still plugged into the
headphone jack.
Disconnect the plug from the
headphone jack.
p. 21
The volume is set too low on the
Level [
▲
] [
▼
] buttons.
Press the Level [
▲
][
▼
] buttons to
raise the volume.
p. 52
The volume is set too low on the
Expression Pedal.
Advance the expression pedal.
p. 120
You do not have a Voice selected.
Voices that have their button
indicator lit can be played.
Press a voice button to select a voice.
p. 40
No sound is heard.
(by the Lower keyboard)
Drums/SFX are selected for the
Lower keyboard, but you are
playing a key to which no drum
sound is assigned.
Turn the Drums/SFX off or play
keys to which drums sounds are
assigned.
p. 56
No sound is heard.
(by the Upper keyboard)
“Percussion Set 3” has been selected
for the Upper keyboard.
When “Percussion Set 3” is selected,
some keys may have no sound
assigned to them.
For the upper keyboard, select a
voice other than “Percussion Set 3.”
p. 42
No sound is heard (when a
MIDI instrument is
connected).
The power of the connected external
devices is not turned on.
Use the correct procedure to turn on
the power of the connected external
devices.
p. 205
–
p. 210
The Computer switch on the bottom
of the unit is not set to “MIDI.”
Change the setting of the computer
switch.
p. 208
Damper Pedal does not
operate.
The damper pedal affects only the
Lower keyboard and Upper
keyboard. The damper pedal does
not affect the Bass pedalboard.
You can change the settings so that
the damper pedal affects the Upper
keyboard.
p. 187
The damper pedal does not affect the
Solo voice.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
Expression Pedal does not
operate.
The function of the Expression Pedal
during recording or the function
during playback has been set to
“COMPOSER.”
Set the expression pedal function
during recording to “PEDAL,” and
during playback to “PEDAL” or
“PEDAL+COMPOSER.”
p. 186
Can’t use the function
assigned to the foot switch.
If “Regist Shift” (change
Registrations) is “RIGHT,” “LEFT,”
or “RIGHT + Load Next,” the foot
switch will be dedicated to switching
the Registration.
Turn “Regist Shift” off.
p. 119
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 213 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
214
Troubleshooting
When the human voice “Jazz
Scat” is selected, playing
dynamics do not change the
sound.
The setting of “Initial Touch” is
turned OFF.
Turn “Initial Touch” on.
p. 185
Rotary effect is not be
applied.
Some sounds do not allow the rotary
effect to be applied.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
Chorus effect does not apply.
Some sounds do not allow the
chorus effect to be applied.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
When you release your
fingers from keys in the
Lower keyboard while
Automatic Accompaniment
and Rhythm are playing, the
Rhythm performance only
remains playing.
Chord Hold is at OFF. Turn “Chord Hold” on.
The Automatic Accompaniment will
play while you press a chord. If
Chord Hold is turned ON, the
Automatic Accompaniment will
continue playing with the Rhythm
even when you take your hand off of
the Lower keyboard.
p. 188
When you release your
fingers from keys in the
Lower keyboard, the notes
continue sounding.
The Lower Voice [Hold] button is at
ON.
Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button
to turn it off (dark).
p. 60
Even though you press only
one key, a multiple number of
notes sound.
Harmony Intelligence is at ON. Turn “Harmony Intelligence” off.
p. 122
Chord Intelligence is turned ON. Turn “Chord Intelligence” off.
p. 70
Sound is produced when you
take your finger off a key.
You have selected a “Marimba
Treml” or “Banjo Treml” sound.
This is not a malfunction.
If you select a “Marimba Treml” or
“Banjo Treml” sound, a sound will
also be produced when you take
your finger off the key.
- - -
Automatic Accompaniment
sounds odd.
The keys for a chord were not
pressed simultaneously.
Either turn on the Chord Intelligence
function, or play the chord correctly.
p. 70
When Chord Intelligence is OFF, the
chord is not being pressed correctly.
Either turn on the Chord Intelligence
function, or play the chord correctly.
p. 70
When performance data from a
device other than the AT-80SL/60SL
is being played together with the
Automatic Accompaniment, the
Automatic Accompaniment may not
be sounded correctly.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
Rhythm sounds odd.
When performance data from a
device other than the AT-80SL/60SL
is being played together with the
Automatic Accompaniment, the
Rhythm performance may not be
sounded correctly.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
Pitch is off
Transpose is in effect. Simultaneously press the Transpose
[-] [+] buttons to cancel the
transposition (the Transpose [-][+]
buttons’ indicators will go out).
p. 114
The tuning is incorrect. Adjust the standard pitch.
p. 194
While set for an octave shift, you are
playing keys beyond the
recommended range. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Adjust the Octave Shift setting.
p. 54
Problem Check Solution Page
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 214 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
215
Troubleshooting
Recording is not possible.
If you wish to erase a previously-
recorded track and then re-record,
press the track button for the desired
track to make that button blink
before you begin recording.
Press the track button for the desired
track to make that button indicator
blink before you begin recording.
p. 155
If you wish to erase a previously-
recorded track and then re-record,
touch the track button for the track
you want to record in the Rec/Play
screen, stopping the button from
flashing.
On Rec/Play screen, touch the track
button for the desired track to make
that button indicator blink before
you begin recording.
p. 155
The recorded performance
has disappeared.
Any performance that has been
recorded is deleted when the power
to the unit is turned off.
A performance cannot be restored
once it’s been deleted, so be sure to
save it on a floppy disk before you
turn off the power.
p. 158
The bass note of the
Automatic Accompaniment
does not sound.
When a voice is selected for the
Pedal Bass part, the bass of the
Automatic Accompaniment will not
sound.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
MIDI messages received at
MIDI In are not sounded.
The Computer switch is not set to
“MIDI” position.
Set the Computer switch to “MIDI.”
p. 208
The Computer switch was set to
“MIDI” after the power was turned
on.
Turn off the power, and then turn
the power on once again.
p. 208
Sound is distorted / cracked.
The Part Balance volume of each part
is too high.
Press the Part Balance button to
lower the volume.
p. 52
The Reverb volume has been raised
when the volume of each Part
Balance button is already raised.
Either lower the Reverb volume, or
adjust the Part Balance of each part.
p. 52
p. 131
The [Master Volume] slider has been
used to raise the overall volume
excessively.
Use the [Master Volume] slider to
lower the overall volume.
p. 20
Some keys (of certain
keyboard parts) sound
strange.
You are playing notes outside the
recommended range of the voice.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
The Rhythm does not change
when you press the
Registration buttons.
The settings at which Registrations
are recalled (Registration Arranger
Update) has been set to
“DELAYED.”
Set the timing at which the arranger
settings are called up (Registration
Arranger Update) to “INSTANT.”
p. 92
p. 190
The volume changes during
playback of performance
data.
When recording is performed
repeatedly while changing the Part
Balance volume, the previously-
recorded Part Balance data remains
in the Control track.
If you wish to get rid of the volume
changes, use the Erase function to
delete the Part Balance data.
p. 168
Bass is heard even though
you are not playing the Bass
Pedalboard.
The Pedal [To Lower] button or the
[Bass Split] button is ON.
When the Pedal [To Lower] button is
ON, the Bass will be sounded by the
Lower keyboard.
In the Pedal part, press the Pedal [To
Lower] button or [Bass Split] button
to turn the button off (dark).
p. 140
p. 142
When playing the same
sound in the Upper keyboard
and Lower keyboard, the
volume is different.
On one of the keyboards, “Initial
Touch” is turned ON.
Set the initial touch settings of the
Upper keyboard and the Lower
keyboard to both On, or both Off.
p. 185
Problem Check Solution Page
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 215 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
216
Troubleshooting
Lower keyboard cannot be
heard.
The Lower keyboard will not
produce sound while an Intro or
Ending is being played.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
The sound is not played
correctly.
If you layer the same type of sound
(for example, Strings 1 and Strings
5), or play an octave-shifted organ
sound, the timing at which you play
a note or the phase relationship
between the two sounds may affect
the way in which the sounds are
heard, but this is not a malfunction.
You are layering sounds of the same
type (e.g., Strings 1 and Strings 5).
Alternatively, you are playing an
organ sound with Octave Shift.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
Can’t play the demo songs.
A floppy disk is inserted in the disk
drive.
In order to play the demo song, you
must remove the floppy disk from
the disk drive.
p. 76
Nothing appears on screen.
The AT-80SL/60SL uses a liquid-
crystal screen, so text may not be
displayed when the ambient
temperature is below freezing.
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
p. 203
Lyrics are not indicated
properly in the display.
With some music files, the lyrics
cannot be displayed correctly.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
In the Notation screen, some lyrics or
notes could extend beyond the edges
of the screen, and not be displayed.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
A button was pressed while the
lyrics were being shown in the
display.
During the display of lyrics, you
could be taken to a different screen if
you press a button.
If you want to have the lyrics be
displayed again, touch <Play> on
the Rec/Play screen.
p. 143
The Touch Screen doesn’t
respond correctly.
The positioning of the Touch Screen
may become displaced if some time
has passed since it was last used
Reposition the Touch screen.
p. 197
Certain instrument are not
heard while playing a song.
The track is muted. Turn off track muting.
p. 147
p. 148
Can’t use Chord Intelligence
function.
Chord Intelligence is at OFF. Turn “Chord Intelligence” on.
p. 70
Score is not indicated
properly in the display.
In the Notation screen, some lyrics or
notes could extend beyond the edges
of the screen, and not be displayed.
This is not a malfunction.
- - -
The Notation display feature is
particularly unsuitable for the
display of difficult, complex musical
works that demand accurate
notation.
This is not a malfunction.
p. 151
If you select a part that does not
contain performance data, notes will
not be displayed in the notation.
Change the part that is displayed.
p. 150
Vertical lines can be seen in
the screen.
This is attributable to the design
fundamentals of a liquid crystal
display, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
Adjusting the display’s contrast can
make such lines less noticeable, so
you may want to try adjusting it.
p. 203
Problem Check Solution Page
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 216 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
217
Troubleshooting
The Bass Range Sounds Odd,
or There Is a Vibrating
Resonance.
Playing at loud volumes may cause
instruments near the AT-80SL/60SL
to resonate. Resonance can also
occur with fluorescent light tubes,
glass doors, and other objects. In
particular, this problem occurs more
easily when the bass component is
increased, and when the sound is
played at higher volumes.
Use the following measures to
suppress such resonance.
• Place speakers so they are 10-15
cm from walls and other surfaces.
• Reduce the volume.
•Move the speakers away from any
resonating objects.
- - -
When listening through
headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as
resonance produced by the AT-
80SL/60SL) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
- - -
The volume level of the
instrument connected to AT-
80SL/60SL is too low.
Could you be using a connection
cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not
contain a resistor.
p. 205
Pressing the expression
pedal while playing back
Atelier performance data
produces a crackling noise
The expression pedal function is set
to “PEDAL+COMPOSER” during
playback of Atelier performance
data.
When this setting is used, moving
the expression pedal while playing
back Atelier performance data may
create a difference between the
expression pedal information in the
performance data and the volume as
set with the expression pedal, which
can result in this kind of sound being
produced.
Set the expression pedal function to
“PEDAL” during playback.
p. 187
Tempo not changing even
when the source tempo is
reselected (when arranging
rhythms using the Rhythm
Customize function).
Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard
Tempo) is set to on.
When the Auto Std Tempo setting is
set to ON and rhythms are switched
while the rhythm is stopped, the
tempo is automatically set to the
tempo for that rhythm.
The tempo setting does not change
automatically, even if the rhythms
are switched with the Auto Std
Tempo setting set to OFF and the
rhythm stopped.
Turn “Auto Std Tempo” off.
p. 189
Unable to save created
rhythm to the User Memory
“Memory Full” appears in the
display.
The available memory remaining in
the AT-80SL/60SL is not sufficient.
First delete some other rhythm
saved to the user memory, then save
the rhythm you have created to the
user memory once again.
p. 182
p. 183
There is no sound from the
twelve keys at the right of the
lower keyboard.
The V-LINK function is set Mode 2.
When V-LINK setting is Mode 2, the
group of twelve keys starting at the
very right of the lower keyboard are
used for controlling video images.
Therefore, no sounds are played
even when you press these keys.
Turn the V-LINK function off, or
select Mode 1 for the V-LINK
function.
p. 201
Problem Check Solution Page
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 217 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
218
Error Message
Error Message Meanings
Copy Protected.
Can’t Save
To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as SMF format.
When you want to save as Atelier format, you can save only original disk.
Can’t Save
This Song.
You can only play the music data. It cannot be saved on a floppy disk or internal memory.
Write Protected
Disk
The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the Protect position.
Change it to the Write position and repeat the procedure.
Master Disk
This floppy disk cannot store the format or save any data. Insert a different disk and repeat
the procedure.
Read Only Song.
Can’t Save
A new song cannot be saved onto this floppy disk.
No Disk
No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive. Insert the disk correctly, and repeat the
procedure.
Disk Full
There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk for the data to be saved. Save the data
onto a different floppy disk or delete music data on the disk.
Unknown Disk
The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive cannot be read.
Please format the floppy disk.
Disk Ejected
The floppy disk was removed from the disk drive while loading or writing was in progress.
Insert the floppy disk and repeat the procedure.
Damaged Disk
This floppy disk is damaged and cannot be used. Insert a different disk and repeat the
procedure.
Can’t Read
This song cannnot be read.
Can’t Play
It cannot be read the floppy disk quickly enough. Press the [Reset] button, then press the
[Play/Stop] button to play the song.
Memory Full
The Rhythm data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
The performance data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
Since the internal memory is full, recording or editing is not possible.
MIDI Buffer Full
The AT-80SL/60SL cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI
device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the AT-80SL/60SL.
Communication
Error
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and sucurely.
Computer I/F
Error
The Computer Switch is set to a wrong position or the computer is set wrongly. Switch off
the AT-80SL/60SL then set the Computer Switch to the correct position and set the
computer correctly. After that, switch on the AT-80SL/60SL again.
Memory Error
There is something wrong with the system. Repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Expansion Board
Not Found.
An error with the instrument. Please contact Roland Service.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 218 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
219
Error Message
Error Message Meanings
Internal Memory
Near Limit
The AT-80SL/60SL is warning you that its memory will soon become full to capacity, so
not much more recording can be done.
Clear Song OK?
To carry out the procedure, you first need to erase performance data in the AT-80SL/60SL.
This message asks you to confirm that you don’t mind doing this. To erase the data, touch
<OK> on the screen.
When you do not want to erase it, touch <Cancel> then save the data on disk.
Overwrite Regist
OK?
This Registration is already being used. To overwrite the previous Registration data in this
memory, touch <OK>. If you decide to keep the previous Registration data in this memory
and save your settings in an unused memory, select a number for which “- - -” is displayed,
and then save the data.
Overwrite Song
OK?
There already is performance data having the same name on the disk.
To replace the existing data with the new version, touch <OK>. To save it as a separate new
file, touch <Cancel> first. Then, after changing the name, save it on disk.
Overwrite Rhythm
OK?
Overwrite the internal Rhythm.
To replace the Rhythm, touch <OK>. When you do not want to overwrite it, touch
<Cancel> then select another Rhythm.
Delete Song
OK?
Delete the song stored on floppy disk.
To delete the song, touch <OK>. When you do not want to delete it, touch <Cancel>.
Delete Rhythm
OK?
Delete the Rhythm.
To delete the Rhythm, touch <OK>. When you do not want to delete it, touch <Cancel>.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 219 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
220
*1 : Rotary: effective, Chorus: ineffective *2 : VIbrato: effective, Aftertouch: effective : Active Expression Voice
Voice List (AT-80SL)
■
Organ
Full Organ1 *1
Full Organ2 *1
Full Organ3 *1
Full Organ4 *1
Full Organ5 *1
Full Organ6 *1
Full Organ7 *1
Full Organ8 *1
Full Organ9 *1
Ballad Organ *1
GoodOldOrgan *1
Jazz Organ1 *1
Jazz Organ2 *1
Jazz Organ3 *1
Jazz Organ4 *1
Jazz Organ5 *1
Jazz Organ6 *1
ComboJazzOrg *1
LightJazzOrg *1
Rock Organ1
Rock Organ2
Lower Organ1 *1
Lower Organ2 *1
Lower Organ3 *1
Lower Organ4 *1
Lower Organ5 *1
Lower Organ6 *1
Manual Bass *1
Pipe Organ1
Pipe Organ2
Pipe Organ3
Pipe Organ4
Pipe Organ5
Pipe Organ6
Pipe Organ7
AEx Pipe Mix
AEx PipeOrg
Diapason 8'
FluteCeleste
Gemshorn 8'
Trompet 8'
Hautbois 8'
Viola 8'
ViolaCeleste
Bombarde16'
T.ViolCelest *2
T.String 8' *2
T.Vox Humana *2
VoxHumana 8' *2
T.Tuba 8' *2
T.Trumpet 8' *2
T.Sax 8' *2
T.Oboe 8' *2
T. Kinura *2
T.Krumet 8'
Eng.Horn 8'
T.ConcertFlt *2
Tibia 8' *2
Theater Or.1 *2
Theater Or.2 *2
Theater Or.3 *2
Theater Or.4 *2
Theater Or.5 *2
Theater Or.6 *2
Theater Or.7 *2
Theater Ens.
LyricTheater
TheaterQuint
AEx T.Mix
AEx Theater *2
Synth. Org.1 *2
Synth. Org.2
Synth. Org.3 *2
Synth. Org.4 *2
Digi Church *2
Metallic Org. *2
Pop. Organ1 *2
Pop. Organ2 *2
Pop. Organ3 *2
Org. Attack1
Org. Attack2
Org. Attack3
Org. Attack4
Org. Click
■
Strings
Full Strings *2
Full Tremolo *2
Str/Spiccato *2
Chamber Str *2
ChamberStr2 *2
Orch.Str.Ens *2
Strings1
Strings2
Strings3 *2
Strings4 *2
Strings5
Strings6
Strings7 *2
Strings8 *2
Rich Pizz. *2
Pizzicato *2
Mellow Pizz. *2
AEx Strings
AEx Str+Trml *2
AEx Str+Brs
AEx Str+Chr
Slow FullStr *2
Slow Str.1
Slow Str.2
Slow Str.3 *2
Synth. Str.1
Synth. Str.2
Synth. Str.3
Violin *2
AEx Violin *2
Viola *2
Cello *2
Cello 2 *2
Er Hu *2
■
Human Voice
Jazz Scat *2
Jazz Scat 2
Jazz Scat 3
Dreamy Choir *2
F.Chorus Luh *2
F.Chorus Who *2
Jazz Doo *2
Jazz Doot *2
Jazz Dat *2
Jazz Bap *2
Jazz DowFall *2
Jazz DoohDot *2
Jazz DahDat *2
Jazz Vaaah *2
Jazz Doea *2
Pop Voice *2
AEx M.Chorus *2
AEx F.Chorus *2
Soprano *2
Soprano 2
Tenor
Tenor&Sop.
Classical
Boys Choir
Boys Choir2 *2
Kids Choir *2
Gregorian
Gospel
Choir
Female 1
Female 2 *2
AEx Choir
Synth. Choir
Synth. Voice *2
Space Voice
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 220 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
221
Voice List (AT-80SL)
*3 : The sounds will also be produced when you take your finger off the key.
Choir Chord
Vocal Menu
Oriental Chr *2
■
Piano
Grand Piano
Bright Piano
Piano1
Piano2
Piano3
AEx PianoStr
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk2
Stage Rhodes *2
Dyno Rhodes *2
Wurly *2
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
E.Piano3
E.Piano4 *2
AEx EP+Str
HarpsiSingle *3
HarpsiDouble *3
Harpsichord
Clavi.
■
Guitar
Nylon-str.Gt *2
Nylon Gt.2 *2
Fl.Guitar *2
Fl.Gtr Roll *2
Requinto Gtr *2
Ac.Gtr Sld *2
Ac.Gtr Hrm *2
Steel-str.Gt *2
12str Guitar *2
AEx Gtr+Str *2
SemAc.Guitar *2
Jazz Guitar *2
Clean Guitar *2
JC E.Guitar *2
Lp Overdrive *2
Overdrive Gt *2
DistortionGt *2
Power Guitar *2
Rock Rhythm *2
Muted Guitar *2
AEx OD Gtr *2
Hawaiian Gt. *2
Pedal Steel *2
Banjo *2
Banjo Treml *3
Mandolin
Harp *2
Harp 2 *2
Celtic Harp *2
Nylon Harp *2
Harpvox *2
Koto *2
Taisho Koto *2
Shamisen *2
Sanshin *2
Chung Ruan *2
Pi Pa *2
Sitar *2
■
Brass/Sax
BrassSect.1 *2
BrassSect.2
Brass 1 *2
Brass 2 *2
Brass 3
Orch.Tutti 1 *2
Orch.Tutti 2 *2
Orch.Tutti 3 *2
Orch.Brs Ens *2
Quad Brass *2
Power Brass *2
FatPop Brass *2
Brass Fall *2
AEx Orch.Brs *2
AEx Brass *2
AEx BigBand *2
Twin Tp. *2
Tp. Section *2
Trumpet Fall *2
Twin Bones *2
Bones Sect. *2
Fr.Horn Sect
Fr.HornSect2
Fr.HornSect3
Fr.HornSect4 *2
MutedFr.Horn *2
AEx Fr.Horn *2
Sax.Section *2
Sax.Section2 *2
Sax.Section3 *2
Sax/Brass
Sax&Clarinet *2
Synth. Brass *2
Trumpet Solo *2
Trumpet *2
Trumpet2 *2
Trumpet3
Tp/Shake *2
Mariachi Tp. *2
HarmonMuteTp *2
Cup Mute Tp. *2
Mute Trumpet *2
MuteTrumpet2 *2
AEx Trumpet *2
Flugel Horn *2
Trombone Solo *2
Trombone *2
Trombone2 *2
F.Horn Solo1 *2
F.Horn Solo2 *2
Soprano Sax *2
Soprano Sax2 *2
Alto Sax Ex *2
Alto Sax *2
Alto Sax2 *2
Blow Sax *2
AEx AltoSax *2
Super Tenor *2
Tenor Sax *2
Tenor Sax2 *2
BaritoneSax *2
■
Woodwinds
Wood Winds *2
Wood Winds 2 *2
AEx Woodwind *2
Flute *2
Flute2 *2
Flute3 *2
AEx Flute *2
Piccolo *2
Synth. Flute
Oboe Solo *2
Oboe *2
AEx Oboe *2
English Horn *2
Bassoon *2
Bassoon 2 *2
ClarinetSolo *2
Clarinet *2
Clarinet2 *2
Clarinet3 *2
Clarinet4 *2
Bs Clarinet *2
Shakuhachi *2
Qu Di *2
Pan Flute *2
Pan Flute 2 *2
Tin Whistle *2
Uillean Pipe *2
Bagpipe *2
BottleBlow *2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 221 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
222
Voice List (AT-80SL)
*1 : Rotary: effective, Chorus: ineffective *2 : VIbrato: effective, Aftertouch: effective : Active Expression Voice
HumanWhistle *2
■
Lead/Pad
Synth. Lead1 *2
Synth. Lead2 *2
Synth. Lead3 *2
Synth. Lead4 *2
Synth. Lead5 *2
Retro Lead *2
JP SuperSaw *2
CC Solo *2
AEx Lead *2
Synth. Pad1
Synth. Pad2
Synth. Pad3
OB Pad *2
Soft Pad *2
Mystic Str. *2
Crystal Pad *2
Polar Night *2
Space Pad *2
Galactic *2
Sugar Key *2
HollowReleas *2
AEx GlassPad *2
Acco.Classic *2
Fr.Musette *2
German Acco. *2
Italian Folk *2
Accordion
AEx Acordion *2
BandoneonFul *2
Bandoneon *2
Blues Harp *2
Harmonica *2
■
Bass
Organ Bass1
Organ Bass2
PedalOrg.16' *1
Pedal Org.8' *1
Pipe Org. Bs
Bombarde
Theater Bass
Str.Bass Pdl *2
String Bass *2
String Bass2 *2
Str.Bass Oct *2
Str.BassSolo *2
Bass+Cymbal *2
Baby Bass *2
Contrabass1 *2
Contrabass2 *2
ContraBs Oct *2
ContraBs+SD *2
AEx Bs+Timp
AEx Bs+Tuba *2
Tuba
Tuba2 *2
Tuba3 *2
E.Bass1
E.Bass2 *2
E.Bass3 *2
E.Bass4 *2
E.Bass5 *2
E.Bass Oct *2
Power Bass *2
Synth. Bass1
Synth. Bass2
Voice Thum *2
■
Percussion
Timpani
Timpani2
Soft Timpani
AEx TimpRoll *2
Concert Cym. *2
Short Cymbal
MalletCymRol
Crash Cymbal *2
Ride Cymbal
Snare & Roll
Snare Drum
Bass Drum
Triangle *2
Tambourine
TambourinRol
Woodblock
Woodblock 2 *2
Castanet
Jingle Bell *2
Church Bell
Perc. Set1
Perc. Set2
Perc. Set3 *2
Orch.HitMenu
DanceHitMenu
AcGtrNzMenu
Jazz Vibes *2
Vibraphone *2
Glockenspiel
Celesta
Organ Harp
Organ Bell
Tubular-bell
Hand Bell *2
Marimba
MarimbaTreml *3
Xylophone
Balafon *2
Steel Drums
Steel Drums2 *2
Yang Qin *2
Santur *2
Kalimba *2
Music Box *2
SoftMusicBox *2
Vibra Bells *2
Digi Bells *2
Finger Snap
Footsteps
Key Typing
Bird *2
■
AEx Voice
AEx Pipe Mix
AEx PipeOrg
AEx T.Mix *2
AEx Theater *2
AEx Strings
AEx Str+Trml *2
AEx Str+Brs
AEx Str+Chr
AEx Violin *2
AEx M.Chorus *2
AEx F.Chorus *2
AEx Choir
AEx PianoStr
AEx EP+Str
AEx Gtr+Str *2
AEx OD Gtr *2
AEx Orch.Brs *2
AEx Brass *2
AEx BigBand *2
AEx Fr.Horn *2
AEx Trumpet *2
AEx AltoSax *2
AEx Woodwind *2
AEx Flute *2
AEx Oboe *2
AEx Lead *2
AEx GlassPad *2
AEx Acordion *2
AEx Bs+Timp
AEx Bs+Tuba *2
AEx TimpRoll *2
* The AEx voice group consists of all
the AEx voices, taken from the entire
collection of voices.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 222 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
223
*1 : Rotary: effective, Chorus: ineffective *2 : VIbrato: effective, Aftertouch: effective : Active Expression Voice
Voice List (AT-60SL)
■
Organ
Full Organ1 *1
Full Organ2 *1
Full Organ3 *1
Full Organ4 *1
Full Organ5 *1
Full Organ6 *1
Full Organ7 *1
Full Organ8 *1
Ballad Organ *1
Jazz Organ1 *1
Jazz Organ2 *1
Jazz Organ3 *1
Jazz Organ4 *1
Jazz Organ5 *1
Jazz Organ6 *1
ComboJazzOrg *1
Rock Organ1
Rock Organ2
Lower Organ1 *1
Lower Organ2 *1
Lower Organ3 *1
Lower Organ4 *1
Lower Organ5 *1
Lower Organ6 *1
Manual Bass *1
Pipe Organ1
Pipe Organ2
Pipe Organ3
Pipe Organ4
Pipe Organ5
Pipe Organ6
Pipe Organ7
AEx Pipe Mix
AEx PipeOrg
Diapason 8'
FluteCeleste
Gemshorn 8'
Trompet 8'
Hautbois 8'
Viola 8'
ViolaCeleste
Bombarde16'
T.String 8' *2
VoxHumana 8' *2
T.Tuba 8' *2
T.Trumpet 8' *2
T.Sax 8' *2
T.Oboe 8' *2
T.Krumet 8'
Eng.Horn 8'
Tibia 8' *2
Theater Or.1 *2
Theater Or.2 *2
Theater Or.3 *2
Theater Or.4 *2
Theater Or.5 *2
Theater Or.6 *2
Theater Or.7 *2
AEx Theater *2
Synth. Org.1 *2
Synth. Org.2
Synth. Org.3 *2
Synth. Org.4 *2
Pop. Organ1 *2
Pop. Organ2 *2
Pop. Organ3 *2
Org. Attack1
Org. Attack2
Org. Attack3
Org. Attack4
Org. Click
■
Strings
Chamber Str *2
Orch.Str.Ens *2
Strings1
Strings2
Strings3 *2
Strings4 *2
Strings5
Strings6
Strings7 *2
Strings8 *2
Pizzicato *2
Mellow Pizz. *2
AEx Strings
AEx Str+Brs
AEx Str+Chr
Slow Str.1
Slow Str.2
Slow Str.3 *2
Synth. Str.1
Synth. Str.2
Synth. Str.3
Violin *2
AEx Violin *2
Viola *2
Cello *2
Er Hu *2
■
Human Voice
Jazz Scat *2
Dreamy Choir *2
Jazz Doo *2
Jazz Doot *2
Jazz Dat *2
Jazz Bap *2
Jazz DowFall *2
Pop Voice *2
Soprano 2
Classical
Boys Choir
Kids Choir *2
Gregorian
Gospel
Choir
Female 2 *2
AEx Choir
Synth. Choir
Synth. Voice *2
Space Voice
Vocal Menu
■
Piano
Grand Piano
Piano1
Piano2
Piano3
AEx PianoStr
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk2
Stage Rhodes *2
Dyno Rhodes *2
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
E.Piano3
E.Piano4 *2
AEx EP+Str
Harpsichord
Clavi.
■
Guitar
Nylon-str.Gt *2
Nylon Gt.2 *2
Requinto Gtr *2
Ac.Gtr Sld *2
Steel-str.Gt *2
12str Guitar *2
AEx Gtr+Str *2
SemAc.Guitar *2
Jazz Guitar *2
Clean Guitar *2
JC E.Guitar *2
Overdrive Gt *2
DistortionGt *2
Muted Guitar *2
Hawaiian Gt. *2
Banjo *2
Banjo Treml *3
Mandolin
Harp *2
Harp 2 *2
Harpvox *2
Koto *2
Taisho Koto *2
Shamisen *2
Sitar *2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 223 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
224
Voice List (AT-60SL)
*1 : Rotary: effective, Chorus: ineffective *2 : VIbrato: effective, Aftertouch: effective : Active Expression Voice
■
Brass/Sax
BrassSect.1 *2
Brass2 *2
Orch.Tutti 1 *2
Orch.Tutti 2 *2
Orch.Brs Ens *2
Quad Brass *2
Power Brass *2
Brass Fall *2
AEx Brass *2
Twin Tp. *2
Tp. Section *2
Twin Bones *2
Fr.Horn Sect
Fr.HornSect2
Fr.HornSect3
Sax.Section *2
Sax.Section2 *2
Sax.Section3 *2
Sax/Brass
Synth. Brass *2
Trumpet *2
Trumpet2 *2
Tp/Shake *2
Mariachi Tp. *2
Cup Mute Tp. *2
Mute Trumpet *2
MuteTrumpet2 *2
Flugel Horn *2
Trombone *2
Trombone2 *2
F.Horn Solo1 *2
F.Horn Solo2 *2
Soprano Sax *2
Soprano Sax2 *2
Alto Sax Ex *2
Alto Sax *2
Alto Sax2 *2
Blow Sax *2
AEx AltoSax *2
Super Tenor *2
Tenor Sax *2
Tenor Sax2 *2
■
Woodwinds
Wood Winds *2
Flute *2
Flute2 *2
Flute3 *2
AEx Flute *2
Piccolo *2
Synth. Flute
Oboe *2
English Horn *2
Bassoon *2
Clarinet *2
Clarinet2 *2
Clarinet3 *2
Clarinet4 *2
Bs Clarinet *2
Shakuhachi *2
Qu Di *2
Pan Flute *2
Pan Flute 2 *2
Bagpipe *2
HumanWhistle *2
■
Lead/Pad
Synth. Lead1 *2
Synth. Lead2 *2
Synth. Lead3 *2
Synth. Lead4 *2
Synth. Lead5 *2
JP SuperSaw *2
Synth. Pad1
Synth. Pad2
Sugar Key *2
HollowReleas *2
Acco.Classic *2
Accordion
Bandoneon *2
Harmonica *2
■
Bass
Organ Bass1
Organ Bass2
Pipe Org. Bs
Bombarde
Theater Bass
Str.Bass Pdl *2
String Bass *2
String Bass2 *2
Str.Bass Oct *2
Bass+Cymbal *2
Contrabass1 *2
Contrabass2 *2
ContraBs Oct *2
AEx Bs+Timp
Tuba
Tuba2 *2
Tuba3 *2
E.Bass1
E.Bass2 *2
E.Bass3 *2
E.Bass4 *2
E.Bass Oct *2
Synth. Bass1
Synth. Bass2
Voice Thum *2
■
Percussion
Timpani
Timpani2
Short Cymbal
MalletCymRol
Crash Cymbal *2
Ride Cymbal
Snare Drum
Bass Drum
Triangle *2
Tambourine
Woodblock
Woodblock 2 *2
Jingle Bell *2
Church Bell
Perc. Set1
Perc. Set2
Perc. Set3 *2
Orch.HitMenu
Vibraphone *2
Glockenspiel
Celesta
Organ Harp
Organ Bell
Tubular-bell
Marimba
MarimbaTreml *3
Xylophone
Steel Drums
Santur *2
Kalimba *2
Music Box *2
Vibra Bells *2
Finger Snap
Bird *2
■
AEx Voice
AEx Pipe Mix
AEx PipeOrg
AEx Theater *2
AEx Strings
AEx Str+Brs
AEx Str+Chr
AEx Violin *2
AEx Choir
AEx PianoStr
AEx EP+Str
AEx Gtr+Str *2
AEx Brass *2
AEx AltoSax *2
AEx Flute *2
AEx Bs+Timp
* The AEx voice group consists of all
the AEx voices, taken from the entire
collection of voices.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 224 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
225
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A
Hand Clap 2
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Pop BD B
Pop BD A
Pop Rim Shot
R&B SD A
Pop SD Flm B
Pop SD 3E
Pop LwTomFlm
Pop CloseHH1 [EXC1]
Pop Lw Tom
Pop CloseHH2 [EXC1]
Pop MdTomFlm
Pop Open HH [EXC1]
Pop Md Tom
Pop HiTomFlm
Pop ChinaCym
Pop Hi Tom
PopRideCym1A
PopCrashCym1
Pop RideBell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
PopCrashCym2
Vibra-Slap 2
PopRideCym1B
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH [EXC1]
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Pop BD B
Pop BD A
Pop Rim Shot
Pop SD 1
Pop SD Flm B
Pop SD 2
Pop LwTomFlm
Pop CloseHH1 [EXC1]
Pop Lw Tom
Pop CloseHH2 [EXC1]
Pop MdTomFlm
Pop Open HH [EXC1]
Pop Md Tom
Pop HiTomFlm
PopCrashCym1
Pop Hi Tom
PopRideCym1A
Pop ChinaCym
Pop RideBell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
PopCrashCym2
Vibra-Slap 2
Pop RideCym2
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
R&BPOP
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Rk Pedal HH [EXC1]
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Rk BD 1B
Rk BD 1A
Rk Rim ShotA
Rk SD 1A
Rk SD Flm
Rk SD 1B
Rk LwTom Flm
Rk CloseHH 1 [EXC1]
Rk Lw Tom
Rk CloseHH 2 [EXC1]
Rk MdTom Flm
Rk Open HH [EXC1]
Rk Md Tom
Rk HiTom Flm
PopCrashCym1
Rk Hi Tom
Rk Ride Cym
Pop ChinaCym
Pop RideBell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
China Cym
Vibra-Slap 2
PopRideCym1B
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
808 BD 2B
808 BD 2A
808 Rim Shot
Dnc SD 2A
Hand Clap 1
Dnc SD 2B
Lw Tom 1
808CloseHH A [EXC1]
Lw Tom 2
808CloseHH B [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
808 Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Hi Tom 1
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 2
Ride Cym 1
Reverse Cym
Ride Bell
TambourinShk
Splash Cym
808 Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Applause
Dnc SD 2C
Dnc SD 2D
Dnc SD 1A
Rm SD 1A
Std2 SD 1
Rm SD 1B
Std SD 1A
Std SD 1B
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
ROCK
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH [EXC1]
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Pop BD B
Pop BD A
Jz SD Sweep1
Jz SD A
Jz SD Sweep2
Jz SD B
Jz LwTom Flm
Pop CloseHH1 [EXC1]
Jz Lw Tom
Pop CloseHH2 [EXC1]
Jz MdTom Flm
Pop Open HH [EXC1]
Jz Md Tom
Jz HiTom Flm
Jz CrashCym1
Jz Hi Tom
Jz RideCym 1
Jz China Cym
Jz RideCym 2
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
Jz CrashCym2
Vibra-Slap 2
Pop RideCym2
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
JAZZ BRUSH HIP HOP
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 225 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
226
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std2 BD 2
Std2 BD 1
Rim Shot
Std2 SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std2 SD 2
Lw Tom 2
Std2 CloseHH [EXC1]
Lw Tom 1
Std2 PedalHH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Std2 Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Std BD 1
Rim Shot
Std SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std2 BD 1
Rm BD
Rim Shot
Rm SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std2 SD 1
Rm2 Lw Tom 2
Std2 CloseHH [EXC1]
Rm2 Lw Tom 1
Std2 PedalHH [EXC1]
Rm2 Md Tom 2
Std2 Open HH [EXC1]
Rm2 Md Tom 1
Rm2 Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Rm2 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Std BD 1
Rim Shot
Std SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
Rm Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Rm Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 1
Rm Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Rm Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
STANDARD 2 ROOMSTANDARD
JAZZ
ROOM 2
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Clap
Vox Dut
Vox Dom
Vox Trush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
Vox Thuh
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
Vox Afahhh
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
VOX DRUM
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 226 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
227
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Elec BD
Rim Shot
Elec SD
Hand Clap 1
Gated SD
Elec LwTom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Elec LwTom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Elec MdTom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Elec MdTom 1
Elec HiTom 2
Crash Cym 1
Elec HiTom 1
Ride Cym 1
Reverse Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Pwr BD
Rim Shot
Gated SD
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
Rm Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Rm Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 1
Rm Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Rm Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
SSlap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Dnc SD 1
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std2 BD 1
808 BD 2A
808 Rim Shot
909 SD
Hand Clap 1
Dnc SD 2B
808 LwTom 2
808CloseHH A [EXC1]
808 LwTom 1
808CloseHH B [EXC1]
808 MdTom 2
808 Open HH [EXC1]
808 MdTom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cym
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
808 Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
808 Hi Conga
808 MdConga
808 LwConga
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
808 Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
808 BD 1
808 Rim Shot
808 SD
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
808 LwTom 2
808CloseHH A [EXC1]
808 LwTom 1
808CloseHH B [EXC1]
808 MdTom 2
808 Open HH [EXC1]
808 MdTom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cym
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
808 Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
808 Hi Conga
808 MdConga
808 LwConga
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
808 Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
TR-808 DANCEELECTRONICPOWER
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 227 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
228
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Bsh BD 2
Std2 BD 1
Rim Shot
Bsh Tap
Bsh Slap
Bsh Sweep
Bsh Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Bsh Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Bsh Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Bsh Md Tom 1
Bsh Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Bsh Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Bsh BD 2
Bsh BD 1
Rim Shot
Bsh Tap
Bsh Slap
Bsh Sweep
Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
Guitar cutting noise (down)
Guitar cutting noise (up)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Bubble
Cat
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Ride Cym 1
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
Rim Shot
Concert SD A
Castanets
Concert SD B
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
ConcertCym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
ConcertCym 1
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Applause
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
ORCHESTRA SOUND EFFECTBRUSH BRUSH 2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 228 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
229
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Rk Pedal HH [EXC1]
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Rk BD 1B
Rk BD 1A
Rk Rim ShotA
Rk SD 1A
Rk SD Flm
Rk SD 1B
Rk LwTom Flm
Rk CloseHH 1 [EXC1]
Rk Lw Tom
Rk CloseHH 2 [EXC1]
Rk MdTom Flm
Rk Open HH [EXC1]
Rk Md Tom
Rk HiTom Flm
PopCrashCym1
Rk Hi Tom
Rk Ride Cym
Pop ChinaCym
Pop RideBell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
China Cym
Vibra-Slap 2
PopRideCym1B
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH [EXC1]
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Pop BD B
Pop BD A
Pop Rim Shot
Pop SD 1
Pop SD Flm B
Pop SD 2
Pop LwTomFlm
Pop CloseHH1 [EXC1]
Pop Lw Tom
Pop CloseHH2 [EXC1]
Pop MdTomFlm
Pop Open HH [EXC1]
Pop Md Tom
Pop HiTomFlm
PopCrashCym1
Pop Hi Tom
PopRideCym1A
Pop ChinaCym
Pop RideBell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
PopCrashCym2
Vibra-Slap 2
Pop RideCym2
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Clap
Vox Dut
Vox Dom
Vox Trush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
Vox Thuh
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
Vox Afahhh
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
ROCK
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A [EXC7]
Hand Clap 2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap 1B
Pop Pedal HH [EXC1]
Gospel Clap
SD Roll
Pop BD B
Pop BD A
Jz SD Sweep1
Jz SD A
Jz SD Sweep2
Jz SD B
Jz LwTom Flm
Pop CloseHH1 [EXC1]
Jz Lw Tom
Pop CloseHH2 [EXC1]
Jz MdTom Flm
Pop Open HH [EXC1]
Jz Md Tom
Jz HiTom Flm
Jz CrashCym1
Jz Hi Tom
Jz RideCym 1
Jz China Cym
Jz RideCym 2
Tambourine 2
Splash Cym
ChaChaCowbel
Jz CrashCym2
Vibra-Slap 2
Pop RideCym2
Hi Bongo 2
Lw Bongo 2
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
Lw Timbale 2
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Cana
HiTimbaleFlm
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi BongoMute
-----
-----
-----
-----
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
BongoCowbelA
-----
JAZZ BRUSHPOP VOX DRUM
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 229 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
230
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std2 BD 2
Std2 BD 1
Rim Shot
Std2 SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std2 SD 2
Lw Tom 2
Std2 CloseHH [EXC1]
Lw Tom 1
Std2 PedalHH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Std2 Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Std BD 1
Rim Shot
Std SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std2 BD 1
Rm BD
Rim Shot
Rm SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std2 SD 1
Rm2 Lw Tom 2
Std2 CloseHH [EXC1]
Rm2 Lw Tom 1
Std2 PedalHH [EXC1]
Rm2 Md Tom 2
Std2 Open HH [EXC1]
Rm2 Md Tom 1
Rm2 Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Rm2 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Std BD 1
Rim Shot
Std SD 1
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
Rm Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Rm Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 1
Rm Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Rm Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
STANDARD 2 ROOMSTANDARD
JAZZ
ROOM 2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 230 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
231
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Elec BD
Rim Shot
Elec SD
Hand Clap 1
Gated SD
Elec LwTom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Elec LwTom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Elec MdTom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Elec MdTom 1
Elec HiTom 2
Crash Cym 1
Elec HiTom 1
Ride Cym 1
Reverse Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
Pwr BD
Rim Shot
Gated SD
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
Rm Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Rm Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Rm Md Tom 1
Rm Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Rm Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
SSlap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Dnc SD 1
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std2 BD 1
808 BD 2A
808 Rim Shot
909 SD
Hand Clap 1
Dnc SD 2B
808 LwTom 2
808CloseHH A [EXC1]
808 LwTom 1
808CloseHH B [EXC1]
808 MdTom 2
808 Open HH [EXC1]
808 MdTom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cym
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
808 Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
808 Hi Conga
808 MdConga
808 LwConga
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
808 Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Std BD 2
808 BD 1
808 Rim Shot
808 SD
Hand Clap 1
Std SD 2
808 LwTom 2
808CloseHH A [EXC1]
808 LwTom 1
808CloseHH B [EXC1]
808 MdTom 2
808 Open HH [EXC1]
808 MdTom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cym
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
808 Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
808 Hi Conga
808 MdConga
808 LwConga
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
808 Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
TR-808 DANCEELECTRONICPOWER
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 231 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
232
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL)
--- : no sound
[EXC] : will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41
43
45
47
42
44
46
36
38
37
87
88
84
86
85
51
52
53
55
57
59
54
56
58
48
50
49
63
64
65
67
69
71
66
68
70
60
62
61
75
76
77
79
81
83
78
80
82
72
74
73
C2
C3
C4
C5
89
91
93
95
90
92
94
99
100
96
98
97
101
103
102
C7
C6
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Bsh BD 2
Std2 BD 1
Rim Shot
Bsh Tap
Bsh Slap
Bsh Sweep
Bsh Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Bsh Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Bsh Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Bsh Md Tom 1
Bsh Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Bsh Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Bsh BD 2
Bsh BD 1
Rim Shot
Bsh Tap
Bsh Slap
Bsh Sweep
Lw Tom 2
Std Close HH [EXC1]
Lw Tom 1
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 2
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Md Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Crash Cym 1
Hi Tom 1
Ride Cym 1
China Cym
Ride Bell
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
Ride Cym 2
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
Guitar cutting noise (down)
Guitar cutting noise (up)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Bubble
Cat
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Std Pedal HH [EXC1]
Std Open HH [EXC1]
Ride Cym 1
Sticks
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
Rim Shot
Concert SD A
Castanets
Concert SD B
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
Tambourine 1
Splash Cym
Cowbell
ConcertCym 2
Vibra-Slap 1
ConcertCym 1
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle [EXC2]
Long Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXC4]
MuteTriangle [EXC5]
OpenTriangle [EXC5]
Shaker 1
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6]
Applause
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
ORCHESTRA SOUND EFFECTBRUSH BRUSH 2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 232 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
233
Manual Percussion List (AT-80SL)
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41 42
36
38
37
C2
Mallet Cymbal
Slap Stick
Ratchet
Concert Cymbal
Concert BD 2
Bar Chime
Finger Snap
Timpani 2 (Low)
Timpani 2 (Hi)
Church Bell 2
Church Bell 2 Loop
Castanet (One Shot)
Castanet
Castanet (Loop)
Tambourine 2
Crash Cymbal
Snare Roll
Concert Snare Drum
Concert Cymbal
Concert BD 1
Jingle Bell
Metronome Bell
Timpani Roll
Timpani
Church Bell
Big Gong
Hand Clap
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Tambourine
Mallet Cymbal
Snare Roll
Concert Snare Drum
Crash Cymbal
Concert BD 2
MalletCymbal Roll
Timpani Roll
Timpani 2 (Low)
Timpani 2 (Hi)
Triangle Open
Big Gong
Triangle Roll
Tambourine 2
Tambourine Roll
WindChime Up
PERC.SET 2
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Roll
Wind Chime Up
Wind Chime Down
Vibra Slap
Finger Cymbal
Gong Roll
Mallet Cymbal Roll
Cowbell
Claves
Clavs Loop
Tambourine
Tambourine 2
Tambourine Roll
PERC.SET 3PERC.SET 1 ORCHESTRA SET
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41 42
36
38
37
C2
Cymbal Roll > Crescendo
Snare Roll
Dynamic Snare
Concert Cymbal 2
Dynamic Bass Drum
Short Cymbal
Timpani Roll 2
Dynamic Timpani (Low)
Dynamic Timpani (Hi)
Cowbell
Claves
Wind Whistle
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Bell Tree
Amen 1(Mid)
Amen 1(Hi1)
Amen 1(Hi2)
Amen 2(Mid)
Amen 2(Hi)
Amen 3(Mid)
Amen 3(Hi)
Alleluia 1(Mid)
Alleluia 1(Hi)
Alleluia 2(Hi)
Alleluia 2(Mid)
Hey (Hi)
Hey (Mid)
Woo (Mid)
Woo (Hi)
VOICE PHRASE
Gong
Hu Yin Lou (Low) [Open/Mute]
Shu Gu
Hu Yin Lou (Hi) [Oenp/Mute]
Shu Gu Rim
Shou Luo (Low)
Tang Gu [Open/Mute]
Shou Luo (Hi)
Nao Bo
Gu (Roll)
Xiao Bo
Gu (Hi)
Banb Gu (Low) [Mid/Flam]
Banb Gu (Hi)
Chen Chen [Open/Close]
ASIANORCHESTRA SET 2
Bongo Open (Low) [mf/f]
Bongo Open (Hi) [mf/f]
Conga (Low) [Mute/Open]
Conga (Hi) [Mute/Open]
Conga [Roll/Thumb]
Timbales Open (Low)
Timbales (Hi) [Open/Rim]
Timbales Fill [Low/Hi]
Claves
Cuica [Low/Hi]
Guiro [Long/Short]
Maracas
Shaker [Long/Short]
Apito [Low/Hi]
Quijada
LATIN SET
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41 42
36
38
37
C2
London Station
Train Pass
Firework
Thunder
Jungle
Bird
Elephant
Dozilla
Clock
Hibashi Furin [Short/Long]
Smash Glass
Bubble
Rain
Wave
Drops
SFX SET 2
Car Engine 2
Car Horn
Compresser
Big Shot
Cricket
Horse-Gallop
SL 1
SL 2
Crack Bottle
Ice Ring
Glass & Glam
Pour Bottle
Soda
Small Club
Baby Laughing
SFX SET
Sabor!
Sabor Sabor!
Grito-Bah
Grito-Chiquitita
Baila Baila!
Arriba Arriba!
Sacala Sacala!
Azucal Azucal!
Grito-Hahahahaha!
A si A si!
Grito-Hoi Hoi Hoi!
Uno!
Dos!
Tres!
Quatro!
Alolalo solo
Alleluia solo
Freedom [Long/Short]
Glory
Alleluia
Soul
Victory
Hey
Woo [Long/Short]
Yeah [Long/Short]
Yes [Long/Short]
One
Two
Three
Aou
VOICE PHRASE 2 VOICE PHRASE 3
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41 42
36
38
37
C2
Wadaiko
Wadaiko Rim
Shimedaiko
Atarigane
Atarigane Side
Furin
Hyoshigi
Ohkawa
Tsuzumi (Low)
Tsuzumi (Hi)
Mokugyo (Low)
Mokugyo (Hi)
Ho
Iyooh
Yoh
JAPANESE SET
Hah Doshita (Solo)
Hah Doshita
Hah Sorekara Doshita
Yaretto
Enya koraya
Hah Dokkoi
Hai Hai
Dokkoi-syo Dokkoi-syo
Hai Hai (Solo)
Dokkoi-syo Dokkoi-syo (Solo)
Dokkoisa
Korasyo
Haiyasaka
Sora Enyakora
Hoisa Hoisa
JAPANESE SET 2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 233 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
234
Manual Percussion List (AT-60SL)
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41 42
36
38
37
C2
Mallet Cymbal
Slap Stick
Ratchet
Concert Cymbal
Concert BD 2
Bar Chime
Finger Snap
Timpani 2 (Low)
Timpani 2 (Hi)
Church Bell 2
Church Bell 2 Loop
Castanet (One Shot)
Castanet
Castanet (Loop)
Tambourine 2
Crash Cymbal
Snare Roll
Concert Snare Drum
Concert Cymbal
Concert BD 1
Jingle Bell
Metronome Bell
Timpani Roll
Timpani
Church Bell
Big Gong
Hand Clap
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Tambourine
Amen 1(Mid)
Amen 1(Hi1)
Amen 1(Hi2)
Amen 2(Mid)
Amen 2(Hi)
Amen 3(Mid)
Amen 3(Hi)
Alleluia 1(Mid)
Alleluia 1(Hi)
Alleluia 2(Hi)
Alleluia 2(Mid)
Hey (Hi)
Hey (Mid)
Woo (Mid)
Woo (Hi)
PERC.SET 2
Bongo Open (Low) [mf/f]
Bongo Open (Hi) [mf/f]
Conga (Low) [Mute/Open]
Conga (Hi) [Mute/Open]
Conga [Roll/Thumb]
Timbales Open (Low)
Timbales (Hi) [Open/Rim]
Timbales Fill [Low/Hi]
Claves
Cuica [Low/Hi]
Guiro [Long/Short]
Maracas
Shaker [Long/Short]
Apito [Low/Hi]
Quijada
LATIN SETPERC.SET 1 VOICE PHRASE
28
29
31
33
35
30
32
34
39
40
41 42
36
38
37
C2
Alolalo solo
Alleluia solo
Freedom [Long/Short]
Glory
Alleluia
Soul
Victory
Hey
Woo [Long/Short]
Yeah [Long/Short]
Yes [Long/Short]
One
Two
Three
Aou
VOICE PHRASE 2
Wadaiko
Wadaiko Rim
Shimedaiko
Atarigane
Atarigane Side
Furin
Hyoshigi
Ohkawa
Tsuzumi (Low)
Tsuzumi (Hi)
Mokugyo (Low)
Mokugyo (Hi)
Ho
Iyooh
Yoh
Car Engine 2
Car Horn
Compresser
Big Shot
Cricket
Horse-Gallop
SL 1
SL 2
Crack Bottle
Ice Ring
Glass & Glam
Pour Bottle
Soda
Small Club
Baby Laughing
JAPANESE SETSFX SET
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 234 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
235
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
●
POP
PopCrashCym1
PopCrashCym2
Splash Cym
Pop ChinaCym
PopRideCym1A
Pop RideCym2
Pop RideBell
Cymbal Roll
Pop CloseHH1
Pop CloseHH2
Pop Pedal HH
Pop Open HH
Pop SD 1
Pop SD 2
Pop SD Flm B
Pop SD 3C
Pop SD 3D
Pop SD Flm A
R&B SD B
Rk SD 2A
Rk SD 2B
Jz SD C
Jz SD D
Rm SD 1
Rm SD 2
8850 SD 1
8850 SD 2
SD Roll
Pop Rim Shot
Rk Rim ShotB
Pop Hi Tom
Pop HiTomFlm
Pop Md Tom
Pop MdTomFlm
Pop Lw Tom
Pop LwTomFlm
Pop BD A
Pop BD B
Pop BD C
Rk BD 2
Jz BD 1
Hip BD 1
Std2 BD 2A
Std2 BD 2B
8850 BD 1
8850 BD 2
909 BD 1A
909 BD 1B
909 BD 2
Jungle BD 1A
Jungle BD 1B
Tambourine 2
BongoCowbelA
BongoCowbelB
ChaChaCowbel
Vibra-Slap 2
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A
Hand Clap 1B
Hand Clap 2
Gospel Clap
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
Finger Snap
Hi Bongo 2
Hi BongoMute
Lw Bongo 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
HiTimbaleFlm
Lw Timbale 2
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Vox Afahhh B
Vox That B
Vox Aahhh B
●
R&B
PopCrashCym1
PopCrashCym2
Splash Cym
Pop ChinaCym
PopRideCym1A
PopRideCym1B
Pop RideBell
Cymbal Roll
Pop CloseHH1
Pop CloseHH2
Pop Pedal HH
Pop Open HH
R&B SD A
R&B SD B
Pop SD 3C
Pop SD 3D
Pop SD 3E
Pop SD Flm A
Rk SD 2A
Rk SD 2B
Rk SD Flm
Jz SD C
Jz SD D
Rm SD 1
Rm SD 2
8850 SD 1
8850 SD 2
SD Roll
Pop Rim Shot
Rk Rim ShotB
Pop Hi Tom
Pop HiTomFlm
Pop Md Tom
Pop MdTomFlm
Pop Lw Tom
Pop LwTomFlm
Pop BD A
Pop BD B
Pop BD C
Rk BD 2
Jz BD 1
Hip BD 1
Std2 BD 2A
Std2 BD 2B
8850 BD 1
8850 BD 2
909 BD 1A
909 BD 1B
909 BD 2
Jungle BD 1A
Jungle BD 1B
Tambourine 2
BongoCowbelA
BongoCowbelB
ChaChaCowbel
Vibra-Slap 2
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A
Hand Clap 1B
Hand Clap 2
Gospel Clap
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
Finger Snap
Hi Bongo 2
Hi BongoMute
Lw Bongo 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
HiTimbaleFlm
Lw Timbale 2
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Vox Afahhh B
Vox That B
Vox Aahhh B
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 235 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
236
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
●
ROCK
PopCrashCym1
Splash Cym
Pop ChinaCym
China Cym
Rk Ride Cym
PopRideCym1B
Pop RideBell
Cymbal Roll
Rk CloseHH 1
Rk CloseHH 2
Rk Pedal HH
Rk Open HH
Rk SD 1A
Rk SD 1B
Rk SD Flm
Pop SD 3A
Pop SD 3B
Pop SD 3C
Pop SD 3D
Pop SD Flm A
R&B SD B
Jz SD C
Jz SD D
Rm SD 1
Rm SD 2
8850 SD 1
8850 SD 2
SD Roll
Rk Rim ShotA
Rk Rim ShotB
Rk Hi Tom
Rk HiTom Flm
Rk Md Tom
Rk MdTom Flm
Rk Lw Tom
Rk LwTom Flm
Rk BD 1A
Rk BD 1B
Rk BD 2
Pop BD C
Jz BD 1
Hip BD 1
Std2 BD 2A
Std2 BD 2B
8850 BD 1
8850 BD 2
909 BD 1A
909 BD 1B
909 BD 2
Jungle BD 1A
Jungle BD 1B
Tambourine 2
BongoCowbelA
BongoCowbelB
ChaChaCowbel
Vibra-Slap 2
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A
Hand Clap 1B
Hand Clap 2
Gospel Clap
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
Finger Snap
Hi Bongo 2
Hi BongoMute
Lw Bongo 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
HiTimbaleFlm
Lw Timbale 2
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Vox Afahhh B
Vox That B
Vox Aahhh B
●
JAZZ BRUSH
Jz CrashCym1
Jz CrashCym2
Splash Cym
Jz China Cym
Jz RideCym 1
Jz RideCym 2
Pop RideCym2
Cymbal Roll
Pop CloseHH1
Pop CloseHH2
Pop Pedal HH
Pop Open HH
Jz SD A
Jz SD B
Jz SD C
Jz SD D
Jz SD Sweep1
Jz SD Sweep2
Pop SD 3A
Pop SD 3B
Pop SD 3C
Pop SD 3D
Pop SD Flm A
R&B SD B
Rm SD 1
Rm SD 2
8850 SD 1
8850 SD 2
SD Roll
Rk Rim ShotB
Jz Hi Tom
Jz HiTom Flm
Jz Md Tom
Jz MdTom Flm
Jz Lw Tom
Jz LwTom Flm
Pop BD A
Pop BD B
Pop BD C
Rk BD 2
Jz BD 1
Hip BD 1
Std2 BD 2A
Std2 BD 2B
8850 BD 1
8850 BD 2
909 BD 1A
909 BD 1B
909 BD 2
Jungle BD 1A
Jungle BD 1B
Tambourine 2
BongoCowbelA
BongoCowbelB
ChaChaCowbel
Vibra-Slap 2
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A
Hand Clap 1B
Hand Clap 2
Gospel Clap
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
Finger Snap
Hi Bongo 2
Hi BongoMute
Lw Bongo 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
HiTimbaleFlm
Lw Timbale 2
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Vox Afahhh B
Vox That B
Vox Aahhh B
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 236 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
237
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
●
HIP HOP
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Reverse Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std2 CloseHH
Std2 PedalHH
Hip Open HH
Hip SD
Dnc SD 2B
Dnc SD 2D
Dnc SD 2E
Dnc SD 2H
Dnc SD 1B
Dnc SD 1C
Dnc SD 1D
Dnc SD 3
Rap SD A
Rap SD B
Rap SD C
Jungle SD
Std SD 1A
Std SD 1B
Std SD 1C
Std2 SD 1
Rm SD 1A
Rm SD 1B
Rm SD 1C
Elec SD
808 SD A
808 SD B
808 SD C
909 SD A
909 SD B
909 SD C
909 SD D
909 SD E
909 SD F
Concert SD
SD Roll
808 Rim Shot
Sticks 2
Lw Tom 1
Lw Tom 2
Md Tom 1
Md Tom 2
Hi Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
909Comp BD A
909Comp BD B
909 BD 3 A
909 BD 3 B
Hip BD 2B
Hip BD 1
Jungle BD 2
Jungle BD 3A
Jungle BD 3B
808 BD 2C
808 BD 2D
808 BD 2E
808 BD 2F
808 BD 2G
808 BD 3
808 BD 1
Hip BD 2A
Std BD 1
Rm BD
Elec BD
TambourinShk
808 Cowbell
HipVibraslap
Vibra-Slap 1
Hip HandClap
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Cabasa
Hip Maracas
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
High-Q
Slap A
Slap B
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Click2
Metro.Click3
Metro.Bell 1
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
Bounce
Techno Hit A
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Techno Hit B
Bam Hit
Bim Hit
Tape Rewind
Phono Noise
●
VOX DRUM
Vox Dut
Vox Dom
Vox Trush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu
Vox That A
Vox That B
Vox Aahhh A
Vox Aahhh B
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
Vox Thuh
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
Vox Afahhh A
Vox Afahhh B
Cymbal Roll
Pop Pedal HH
Pop SD 3C
Pop SD 3D
Pop SD Flm A
R&B SD B
Rk SD 2A
Rk SD 2B
Jz SD C
Jz SD D
Rm SD 1
Rm SD 2
8850 SD 1
8850 SD 2
Rk Rim ShotB
Pop BD C
Rk BD 2
Jz BD 1
Hip BD 1
Vox Bum
Std2 BD 2
8850 BD 1
8850 BD 2
909 BD 1A
909 BD 1B
909 BD 2
Jungle BD 1A
Jungle BD 1B
BongoCowbelA
BongoCowbelB
707 Claps
Hand Clap 1A
Hand Clap 1B
Hand Clap 2
Gospel Clap
FlamencClapL
FlamencClapR
Finger Snap
Hi Bongo 2
Hi BongoMute
Lw Bongo 2
Lw BongoMute
Hi CongaSlap
Hi Conga 2
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 2
HiTimbaleFlm
Lw Timbale 2
LoTimbaleFlm
HiTimbalePhr
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 237 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
238
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
Shaker 3
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
●
STANDARD
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Std SD 1
Std SD 2
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Hi Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Md Tom 1
Md Tom 2
Lw Tom 1
Lw Tom 2
Std BD 1
Std BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
STANDARD 2
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std2 CloseHH
Std2 PedalHH
Std2 Open HH
Std2 SD 1
Std2 SD 2
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Hi Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Md Tom 1
Md Tom 2
Lw Tom 1
Lw Tom 2
Std2 BD 1
Std2 BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Finger SnapB
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Bar Chimes B
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
ROOM
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Std SD 1
Std SD 2
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Rm Hi Tom 1
Rm Hi Tom 2
Rm Md Tom 1
Rm Md Tom 2
Rm Lw Tom 1
Rm Lw Tom 2
Std BD 1
Std BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 238 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
239
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
ROOM 2
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std2 CloseHH
Std2 PedalHH
Std2 Open HH
Rm SD 1
Std2 SD 1
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Rm2 Hi Tom 1
Rm2 Hi Tom 2
Rm2 Md Tom 1
Rm2 Md Tom 2
Rm2 Lw Tom 1
Rm2 Lw Tom 2
Rm BD
Std2 BD 1
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
POWER
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Gated SD
Std SD 2
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Rm Hi Tom 1
Rm Hi Tom 2
Rm Md Tom 1
Rm Md Tom 2
Rm Lw Tom 1
Rm Lw Tom 2
Pwr BD
Std BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
ELECTRONIC
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
Reverse Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Elec SD
Gated SD
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Elec HiTom 1
Elec HiTom 2
Elec MdTom 1
Elec MdTom 2
Elec LwTom 1
Elec LwTom 2
Elec BD
Std BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
TR-808
808 Cym
Crash Cym 2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 239 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
240
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
808CloseHH A
808CloseHH B
808 Open HH
808 SD
Std SD 2
SD Roll
808 Rim Shot
Sticks 1
808 Hi Tom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Md Tom 1
808 Md Tom 2
808 Lw Tom 1
808 Lw Tom 2
808 BD 1
Std BD 2
Tambourine 1
808 Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
808 Hi Conga
808 Md Conga
808 Lw Conga
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
808 Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
DANCE
808 Cym
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
808CloseHH A
808CloseHH B
808 Open HH
909 SD
Dnc SD 2B
SD Roll
808 Rim Shot
Dnc SD 1
808 Hi Tom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Md Tom 1
808 Md Tom 2
808 Lw Tom 1
808 Lw Tom 2
808 BD 2A
Std2 BD 1
Tambourine 1
808 Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
808 Hi Conga
808 Md Conga
808 Lw Conga
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
808 Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
808 Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
JAZZ
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Std SD 1
Std SD 2
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Hi Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Md Tom 1
Md Tom 2
Lw Tom 1
Lw Tom 2
Bsh BD 1
Bsh BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Hand Clap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
BRUSH
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Bsh Tap
Bsh Slap
Bsh Sweep
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 240 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
241
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)
Hi Tom 1
Hi Tom 2
Md Tom 1
Md Tom 2
Lw Tom 1
Lw Tom 2
Bsh BD 1
Bsh BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
BRUSH 2
Crash Cym 1
Crash Cym 2
Splash Cym
China Cym
Ride Cym 1
Ride Cym 2
Ride Bell
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Bsh Tap
Bsh Slap
Bsh Sweep
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Bsh Hi Tom 1
Bsh Hi Tom 2
Bsh Md Tom 1
Bsh Md Tom 2
Bsh Lw Tom 1
Bsh Lw Tom 2
Std2 BD 1
Bsh BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
High-Q
Slap A
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
●
ORCHESTRA
ConcertCym 1
ConcertCym 2
Splash Cym
Ride Cym 1
Std Close HH
Std Pedal HH
Std Open HH
Concert SD A
Concert SD B
SD Roll
Rim Shot
Sticks 1
Timpani f
Timpani e
Timpani d#
Timpani d
Timpani c#
Timpani c
Timpani B
Timpani A#
Timpani A
Timpani G#
Timpani G
Timpani F#
Timpani F
Concert BD 1
Concert BD 2
Tambourine 1
Cowbell
Vibra-Slap 1
Finger SnapA
Hi Bongo 1
Lw Bongo 1
Hi CongaMute
Hi Conga 1
Lw Conga 2
Hi Timbale 1
Lw Timbale 1
Hi Agogo
Lw Agogo
Shaker 1
Cabasa
Maracas
ShortWhistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi WoodBlock
Lw WoodBlock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangle
OpenTriangle
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes A
Castanets A
Castanets B
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
Square Click
Metro.Click1
Metro.Bell 1
Key to Abbreviations
Rk
→
Rock
Jz
→
JazzBrush
Hip
→
HipHop
Std
→
Standard
Rm
→
Room
Std2
→
Standard2
Rm2
→
Room2
Pwr
→
Power
Elec
→
Electric
Bsh
→
Brush
Hi
→
High
Md
→
Mid
Lw
→
Low
Cym
→
Cymbal
HH
→
HighHat
SD
→
SnareDrum
BD
→
BassDrum
Flm
→
Flam
Phr
→
Phrase
Metro.
→
Metronome
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 241 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
242
Rhythm List (AT-80SL)
■
Big Band/Swing
LooseBigBand
Big Serenade
Big Band Pop
Fast BigBand
Cool Swing
Jazzy Choir
Organ Swing
Scat Swing
New Big Band
BigBandSwing
BigBndBallad
Big Band
Club Swing
Vocal Swing
Medium Swing
A Cappella
Big Band 2
Jazz Band
ChooChooSwng
Boogie
Combo
Slow Swing
Swing
Blues
Shuffle
■
Country/Gospel
Cntry Dreams
D Country 1
D Country 2
OldtimeCntry
GospelShuffl
Soft Gospel
Gospel Piano
Gospel Pop
HonkyTonkin'
Hoedown
Twostep
CountryPiano
Revival
Gospel Shout
GospelBallad
Gospel 1
CountrySwing
Easy Country
CountryWaltz
Cajun
Gospel 2
Anthem
R&B
Chapel
CtrySerenade
CountryRoads
■
Oldies/Contempo
Pop Fox
Easy 8-Beat
Rock'n'Fever
JB Soul
Groovin'
Michael'sPop
8-Beat Pop
'70s 1
Let's Twist
Surf'fun
Swing Pop
Mersey Beat
Let's Dance
PopularPiano
Easy Listen1
Easy Listen2
Early Rock
'50s Ballad
Slow Dance
Acoustic Pop
Euro Dance
Rollin'
16BeatShuffl
Easy Listen3
Beach Sound
Twist
'50s Pop 1
'50s Pop 2
Easy Listen4
Light Fusion
'70s Disco
16-BeatPop 1
Dreamin'
Da Blues
Motown
Pop'n'Roll
16-BeatPop 2
Light HipHop
Sunny Pop
Hip Hop
Rock'n'Roll
ShufflePop 1
ShufflePop 2
Rock'n'Shffl
House Pop
Rock'n'Pop
Cute Pop
Rock'n'Roll2
AcousticRock
■
Ballad
ContmpBallad
6/8 Ballad
Scat Ballad
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
SunnyFeelin'
Soft Ballad
Ballad
Love Romance
Love Songs
Torch Song
Torch Song 2
MediumBallad
Pop Ballad
'60s Ballad
Crystal
Classic
■
World
Paris
French Waltz
Irish
Ireland
Scotland
Hula
Hawaiian
D Marsch 6/8
Sevilla
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 242 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
243
Rhythm List (AT-80SL)
Habanera
Reggae
■
Latin
Slow Rhumba
BigBandSamba
New ChaCha
Trad Tango
Mambo 3
Plena
Bossa Nova 1
Piano Latin
Slow Bossa
Slow Beguine
Latin
Rhumba
Bossa Nova
Bossa Nova 2
Bossa Nova 3
Bossa Nova 4
FastBosaNova
NewBossaNova
ChaCha
ChaCha 2
Salsa
Samba
Rhumba 2
Beguine
Mambo
Tango 1
Tango 2
Latin Fusion
Samba Rio
■
Waltz/March
Quiet Waltz
Slow Waltz
Jazz Waltz
Summer Days
MarchingBand
Parade
March
March 4/4
Last Dance
StringsWaltz
Waltz
Musette
March 6/8
March 2/4
Simple March
Vienna Waltz
■
Trad/Showtime
Quick Step
Lager Polka
Paso Doble
Foxtrot 2
Stage Waltz
Raindrops
Screen 1
Screen 2
Polka
Charleston
Foxtrot
Ragtime
Music Hall
Broadway
Bubbles
Balloon Trip
Dixieland
PianoBoogie1
Festival
Little Steps
Cinema
Entertaining
■
Acoustic
Guitar Trio
Fireside
G.Pop
G.Fast Pop
G.Slow
G.Shuffle
PianoRagtime
P.Swing
P.Slow
P.Jazz
P.Night
P.Pop
P.Concerto
R.8-Beat 1
R.8-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 1
R.16-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 3
R.16-Beat 4
R.Swing 1
R.Afro&Swing
R.5BeatSwing
R.Shuffle 1
R.Waltz 1
R.March 1
R.5-Beat
R.7-Beat
■
Disk/User
6/8 Ballad
Trad Tango
MarchingBand
Guitar Trio
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 243 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
244
Rhythm List (AT-60SL)
■
Big Band/Swing
LooseBigBand
Big Serenade
Fast BigBand
New Big Band
Organ Swing
Scat Swing
Club Swing
Vocal Swing
BigBandSwing
BigBndBallad
Big Band
Big Band 2
Medium Swing
A Cappella
Combo
Slow Swing
Jazz Band
ChooChooSwng
Boogie
Blues
Swing
Shuffle
■
Country/Gospel
Cntry Dreams
D Country 1
D Country 2
OldtimeCntry
Soft Gospel
Gospel Pop
Revival
GospelBallad
Hoedown
Twostep
CountryPiano
CountrySwing
Gospel 1
Gospel 2
Anthem
R&B
Easy Country
CountryWaltz
Cajun
CountryRoads
■
Oldies/Contempo
JB Soul
Let's Twist
Surf'fun
Swing Pop
Groovin'
Michael'sPop
8-Beat Pop
'70s 1
Mersey Beat
'50s Ballad
Slow Dance
Acoustic Pop
Let's Dance
PopularPiano
Easy Listen1
Easy Listen2
Beach Sound
Twist
'50s Pop 1
'50s Pop 2
Euro Dance
Rollin'
Easy Listen3
16-BeatPop 1
Dreamin'
Motown
Pop'n'Roll
Rock'n'Roll
16-BeatPop 2
Light HipHop
Hip Hop
House Pop
ShufflePop 1
ShufflePop 2
Rock'n'Pop
Cute Pop
■
Ballad
6/8 Ballad
Scat Ballad
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
SunnyFeelin'
Soft Ballad
Ballad
Love Romance
Love Songs
Torch Song
MediumBallad
Pop Ballad
'60s Ballad
Crystal
Classic
■
World
Paris
French Waltz
Irish
Ireland
Scotland
Hula
Hawaiian
D Marsch 6/8
Reggae
■
Latin
Slow Rhumba
Trad Tango
Mambo 3
Plena
Bossa Nova 1
Slow Bossa
Slow Beguine
Latin
Rhumba
Bossa Nova
Bossa Nova 2
Bossa Nova 3
Bossa Nova 4
FastBosaNova
NewBossaNova
ChaCha
ChaCha 2
Salsa
Samba
Beguine
Mambo
Tango 1
Tango 2
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 244 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
245
Rhythm List (AT-60SL)
Latin Fusion
Samba Rio
■
Waltz/March
Quiet Waltz
Slow Waltz
Jazz Waltz
Summer Days
MarchingBand
March
March 4/4
March 6/8
Last Dance
StringsWaltz
Waltz
Musette
March 2/4
Simple March
■
Trad/Showtime
Quick Step
Lager Polka
Foxtrot 2
Polka
Stage Waltz
Raindrops
Screen 1
Screen 2
Charleston
Foxtrot
Ragtime
Dixieland
Music Hall
Broadway
Festival
Little Steps
PianoBoogie1
■
Acoustic
Guitar Trio
Fireside
G.Pop
G.Fast Pop
G.Slow
G.Shuffle
PianoRagtime
P.Swing
P.Slow
P.Jazz
P.Night
P.Pop
R.8-Beat 1
R.8-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 1
R.16-Beat 2
R.16-Beat 3
R.16-Beat 4
R.Swing 1
R.5BeatSwing
R.Shuffle 1
R.Waltz 1
R.March 1
R.5-Beat
■
Disk/User
6/8 Ballad
Trad Tango
MarchingBand
Guitar Trio
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 245 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
246
Music Style Disk List
(AT-80SL/60SL)
Disk 1
01 BigBndBalld2
02 Boogie
03 Jazz Band
04 Blues 2
05 Blues 3
06 Big Band 4
07 Swing
08 MidiumSwing2
09 Slow Swing 2
10 Bluegrass 1
11 Bluegrass 2
12 Cajun
13 Slow Country
14 ContryBallad
15 CountrySwing
16 Two Step 2
17 Train Beat
18 Twist 2
19 Slow Rock 2
20 Baroque
21 Classic
22 Charleston
23 Dixieland 2
24 Foxtrot
25 Macarena
26 Miami
27 Merenge
28 Reggae
29 Tequila
30 Hawaiian 2
31 Bossa Nova 2
32 FastBosaNova
33 Bossa Nova 5
34 Chacha 3
35 Salsa 2
36 Mambo 2
37 Samba 2
38 Tango 4
39 Beguine 2
40 Easy Listen3
41 Easy Listen4
42 Easy Listen5
43 Easy Listen6
44 Easy Listen7
45 Pop Piano
46 ShufflePop 1
47 Gospel 2
48 GospelBallad
49 French Waltz
50 Vienna Waltz
51 Folk Waltz
52 Slow Waltz 2
53 Swing Waltz
54 March 2/4
55 D Marsch 6/8
56 R&B 2
57 Rock'n'Roll2
58 Rock'n'Roll3
59 Contemp 1
60 Contemp 2
61 Funk 1
62 Dance Pop 2
Disk 2
01 Standard
02 Five
03 Afro & Swing
04 Country Rock
05 ContryWaltz2
06 Western
07 Western 2
08 Ragtime 2
09 PianoBoogie2
10 Reggae 2
11 Volk Musik
12 Bossa Nova 6
13 Rhumba 3
14 Dance Rhumba
15 Dance Mambo
16 Tango 3
17 Tango 5
18 Tango 6
19 Sevilla
20 Pop 1
21 Pop 2
22 Pop 3
23 Ballad 2
24 Ballad 3
25 Simple 8Beat
26 Gt.Arpeggio1
27 Gt.Arpeggio2
28 ThreeFinger1
29 ThreeFinger2
30 Gt.Stroke
31 Gt.Shuffle
32 16BeatShffl2
33 DeutchWalzer
34 Jazz Waltz 2
35 Swing Waltz2
36 SimpleMarch2
37 Folk Dance
38 8Beat Enka
39 16Beat Enka
40 Ondo
41 Schlager 1
42 Schlager 2
43 Schlager 3
44 Contemp 3
45 Rock 1
46 Rock 2
47 Rock 3
48 Funk 2
49 70's Disco 2
50 Dance Pop 1
51 Dance Pop 3
52 Dance Pop 4
53 Dance Pop 5
World Style Disk
01 Tejano
02 Country Folk
03 Country Rock
04 CountryBlues
05 Rock'n'Night
06 StridePiano
07 Piano Ballad
08 SFX Movie
09 Scotland 6/8
10 British Pop
11 Disco People
12 70's 8beat
13 On The Town
14 Fast Waltz
15 12/8 Ballad
16 Easy Swing
17 German Waltz
18 Deutsch-Pop
19 Polonaise
20 Ballade 6/8
21 Disco-Beat
22 Party-Beat
23 Dt'Halfbeat
24 Evergreen
25 Paris Waltz
26 Paris March
27 ChansonTango
28 Java
29 French Pop 1
30 French Pop 2
31 French Pop 3
32 Paso Doble
33 Mood Kayou
34 TasogareTown
35 Enka 1
36 Enka 2
37 16Beat Pop
38 Power 8Beat
39 AshitaNoHero
40 Groupe Sounds
41 House Pop
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 246 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
247
Chord List
●
symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord.
★
symbol: Chord shown with an “
★
”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “
★
.”
Cm7 5
CC#DE EF
Cmaj7 C#maj7 Dmaj7 E maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7
C7 C#7 D7 E 7 E7 F7
Cm C#m Dm E m Em Fm
Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 E m7 Em7 Fm7
Cdim C#dim Ddim E dim Edim Fdim
Dm7 5 Em7 5
Caug C#aug Daug E aug Eaug Faug
Csus4 C#sus4 Dsus4 E sus4 Esus4 Fsus4
C7sus4 C#7sus4 D7sus4 E 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4
Fm7 5E m7 5C#m7 5
C6 C#6 D6 E 6 E6
Cm6 Dm6 Em6
F6
Fm6
C#m6 E m6
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 247 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
248
Chord List
F# G A A B B
F#maj7 Gmaj7 A maj7 Amaj7 B maj7 Bmaj7
F#7 G7 A 7 A7 B 7 B7
F#m Gm A m Am B m Bm
F#m7 Gm7 A m7 Am7 B m7 Bm7
F#dim Gdim A dim Adim B dim Bdim
Gm7 5 Am7 5 Bm7 5
F#aug Gaug A aug Aaug B aug Baug
F#sus4 Gsus4 A sus4 Asus4 B sus4 Bsus4
F#7sus4 G7sus4 A 7sus4 A7sus4 B 7sus4 B7sus4
B m7 5A m7 5F#m7 5
G6
Gm6
A6A 6 B6
Bm6
B 6
B m6Am6A m6
F#6
F#m6
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 248 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
249
Glossary
Arrangement
This refers to changes that have been made in an original
tune, by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the
instruments used.
Automatic Accompaniment
Automatic Accompaniment is automatic accompaniment
when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are
pressed to specify the chord.
Basic Chord
This refers to the most commonly used types of chord, which
are generally the following six types: major chords, minor
chords, minor seventh chords, minor seventh (5) chords,
dominant seventh chords, and diminished seventh chords.
Chord
Notes of two or more pitches sounded simultaneously.
Chords consisting of three notes are called “triads,” and are
the most basic type of chord.
Chorus
An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound.
Ending
This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop
playing the Automatic Accompaniment, the AT-80SL/60SL
plays an Ending appropriate for the Rhythm.
Glide
An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then
gradually returns it to normal.
Intro
This is the introductory portion of an Automatic
Accompaniment performance. The AT-80SL/60SL plays an
intro ideally suited to each Rhythm when it starts playing the
Automatic Accompaniment.
Inversion
When the lowest note of a chord is the root, the chord is said
to be in “root position.” In contrast, forms of a chord in
which other notes are the lowest pitch are called
“inversions.”
Mute
To silence a sound. The AT-80SL/60SL provides a Track
Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button
indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded,
so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced.
Panel Settings
Settings such as sound selections, tempo, Rotary fast/slow.
Pitch Bend
An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch.
Registration
A unit of data that contains the performance state of the
instrument, such as sound selections and panel settings.
Reverb
An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or
concert hall.
Root Note
The root note is the basis of a chord. All chords are built on a
root note, which is the part of the chord name given in
uppercase letters.
Rotary
An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound
when a rotating speaker is used. The Rotary effect produces
two types of modulation: fast or slow.
Split
A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two
or more areas, and a different sound assigned to each area.
The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the
“Split Point.”
Sustain
An effect that adds a decay to each note. The AT-80SL/60SL
allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part,
lower part, and pedal part.
Vibrato
An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch.
Voice
The AT-80SL/60SL is able to produce the sounds of various
instruments. These sounds are called “Voices.”
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 249 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
250
Glossary
■
About ATELIER Series Sound
Generator
The ATELIER series come equipped with GM2/GS sound
generators.
General MIDI
General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary
designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound
generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files
that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI
logo ( ).
Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played
back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to
produce essentially the same musical performance.
General MIDI 2
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 ( )
recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI
left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even
greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the
original General MIDI recommendations, such as how
sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled,
have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available
sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant
sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music
files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2
logo. In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI,
which does not include the new enhancements, is referred to
as “General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from
General MIDI 2.
GS format
The GS Format ( ) is Roland’s set of specifications for
standardizing the performance of sound generating devices.
In addition to including support for everything defined by
the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format
additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides
for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a
wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb
and chorus.
Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily
include new sounds and support new hardware features
when they arrive.
SMF with Lyrics
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that
contains the lyrics. When music files carrying the “SMF with
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one
bearing the same logo), the lyrics appears in its display.
XGlite
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that
defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and
the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General
MIDI 1 specification.
XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format.
You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone
generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may
play back differently compared to the original files, due to
the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 250 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
251
Replacing the Illumination Bulbs
(AT-80SL Only)
• Before replacing any light bulbs, you must turn off the
power and disconnect the power cord from the AC
outlet.
• Wait until the bulb has cooled to room temperature
before attempting to replace it.
• Never touch a bulb while it is still hot.
• If the bulb burns out, replace it as soon as possible.
•In households with small children, make certain that you
keep all bulbs or screws that you remove well out of the
reach of children, so they don’t accidentally put them
into their mouths.
•Never turn on the power of the illumination while a bulb
is being replaced. If the illumination is powered-on, the
bulb will become hot, and may cause burns.
• You must replace the bulb with a bulb of the specified
model number.
■
Before you continue
• Note which bulb has burned out.
Before you begin, you must note the location of the bulb
that needs to be replaced, to ensure that the illumination
is not powered-on while replacing the bulb.
•Leave the power turned off for at least 20 minutes before
changing the light bulb.
When the illumination is turned on, the light bulb and
the vicinity of the bulb will become hot. Turn off the
power of the instrument 20 minutes before changing the
light bulb, and verify that the vicinity of the bulb is no
longer hot before you exchange the light bulb.
• Obtain the replacement light bulb.
■
Required items
• Phillips screwdriver (no. 2) (when replacing the music
rest illumination bulb)
• Slotted screwdriver (when replacing the pedal area
illumination bulb)
• Replacement light bulb
■
Panel illumination
Remove the panel lamp cover
1.
Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
2.
Use both hands to slightly raise the cover, slide it
toward the rear, and open the cover.
3.
In four locations of the panel lamp cover (A),
loosen screws (B).
NOTE
The panel lamp cover screws cannot be removed from the
panel lamp cover.
NOTE
Do not remove any screws other than those in the specified
four locations.
fig.01
4.
Lift the panel lamp cover (A) slightly, and remove
it from the hook.
fig.02
Illuminated location Bulb type
Panel illumination LAMP FB33
hook
A
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 251 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
252
Replacing the Illumination Bulbs (AT-80SL Only)
Remove/install the light bulb
5.
Slightly raise the cover.
6.
Grasping the body of the light bulb, pull it slowly
toward yourself to remove it.
fig.03
7.
Align the pins of the new light bulb with the
holes of the socket, and insert the bulb straight in.
NOTE
Be aware that if the pins of the light bulb are not aligned with
the holes of the socket when installing the bulb, or if the bulb
is inserted at an angle, the pins of the bulb could get
damaged.
fig.04
NOTE
Do not disconnect the connector located beside the light bulb.
NOTE
Be careful not to touch the metal by which the lamp board is
suspended.
NOTE
Never turn on the power while replacing a light bulb.
Attach the panel lamp cover
1.
Align the square hole of the panel lamp cover
with the hook.
fig.05
2.
Hook the square hole of the panel lamp cover
onto the hook.
3.
Grasp the two screws located in the center of the
panel lamp cover, and while lifting the panel
lamp cover, lightly tighten the screws.
fig.06
NOTE
Do not completely tighten the two middle screws at this
time.
4.
Firmly tighten the screws at the left and right
ends of the panel lamp cover.
5.
Firmly tighten the two screws at the middle of the
panel lamp cover.
NOTE
Make sure to tighten the screws in all four locations.
hook
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 252 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
253
Remplacement des ampoules (AT-80SL)
• Avant de remplacer les ampoules, éteignez l’appareil et
débranchez le câble d’alimentation de la prise électrique.
• Remplacez l’ampoule une fois qu’elle est refroidie (à la
température de la pièce).
• Ne touchez pas une ampoule chaude.
• Si l’ampoule est grillée, remplacez-la le plus tôt possible.
• S’il y a des jeunes enfants, faites attention qu’ils ne
mettent pas l’ampoule ou les vis enlevées dans leur
bouche.
• Ne mettez jamais l’appareil d’éclairage sous tension
pendant que vous remplacez une ampoule. Si l’appareil
d’éclairage est sous tension pendant le remplacement,
l’ampoule chauffera et il y aura risque de brûlure.
• L’ampoule de remplacement doit être du modèle
spécifié.
■
Avant de poursuivre le
remplacement
• Notez l’ampoule grillée.
Avant d’entreprendre le remplacement, vous devez
noter l’emplacement de l’ampoule à remplacer pour
vous assurer que l’éclairage n’est pas allumé pendant
que vous remplacez l’ampoule grillée.
• Éteignez l’appareil et laissez-le éteint au moins 20
minutes avant de changer l’ampoule.
Lorsque l’éclairage est allumé, l’ampoule et les surfaces à
proximité de l’ampoule seront chaudes. Éteignez
l’appareil 20 minutes avant de changer l’ampoule et
assurez-vous que les surfaces à proximité de l’ampoule
sont refroidies avant de la changer.
• Ayez l’ampoule de remplacement sous la main
■
Outils nécessaires
• Tournevis à pointe cruciforme (no 2) (pour remplacer
l’ampoule du lutrin)
• Tournevis pour écrous à fente (pour remplacer
l’ampoule d’éclairage des pédales)
• Ampoule de remplacement
■
Éclairage du panneau
Retirer le couvercle de la lampe du
tableau
1.
Débranchez le câble d’alimentation de la prise.
2.
Soulevez légèrement le couvercle des deux mains,
faites-le glisser vers l’arrière et ouvrez-le.
3.
Dévissez les quatre vis (B) qui retiennent le
couvercle (A) de la lampe du tableau.
NOTE
Il n’est pas possible de retirer complètement les vis du
couvercle.
NOTE
Ne retirez pas d’autres vis que les quatre vis montrées dans
l’illustration.
fig.01
4.
Soulevez légèrement le couvercle et retirez-le du
crochet qui le retient.
fig.02
Zone d’éclairage Type d’ampoule
Éclairage du panneau AMPOULE FB33
hook
A
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 253 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
254
Remplacement des ampoules (AT-80SL)
Retrait de l’ampoule grillée et installation
de l’ampoule de remplacement
5.
Soulevez légèrement le couvercle.
6.
Saisissez l’ampoule. $B!$(B et tirez-la lentement
vers vous pour la retirer.
fig.03
7.
Alignez les broches de la nouvelle ampoule et les
trous de la douille et insérez l’ampoule tout droit.
NOTE
Assurez vous que les broches de l’ampoule soient bien
alignées avec les trous de la douille; si l’ampoule est insérée
en angle, il y a risque d’endommager les broches.
fig.04
NOTE
Ne déconnectez pas le connecteur situé à côté de l’ampoule.
NOTE
Faites attention de ne pas toucher la pièce métallique à
laquelle la plaque de soutien de la lampe est suspendue.
NOTE
N’allumez jamais l’appareil pendant le remplacement d’une
ampoule.
Fixer le couvercle de la lampe du tableau
1.
Alignez l’ouverture angulaire du couvercle de la
lampe du tableau et le crochet.
fig.05
2.
Accrochez le couvercle de la lampe au crochet.
3.
Saisissez les deux vis situées au centre du
couvercle de la lampe et tout en soulevant le
couvercle, vissez-les légèrement.
fig.06
NOTE
À cette étape, ne vissez pas complètement les vis.
4.
Vissez complètement les vis aux extrémités
gauche et droite du couvercle.
5.
Vissez complètement les deux vis au centre du
couvercle du panneau de la lampe.
NOTE
Les quatre vis doivent être serrées.
hook
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 254 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
255
Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off
■
Settings That Are Stored After
the Power Is Turned Off
Arranger Update
Transpose Update
Master Tune
Rotary Speed
Rotary Color
Registration Shift
Expression Curve
Send PC Switch
MIDI IN Mode
Lyric On/Off
Metronome Sound
Mic Echo
Aux Out Mode
TV Format
Registration Name
■
Settings That Are Stored In the
Registration Buttons
Registration Name
Registration Shift
Arranger Update
Transpose Update
■
Settings That Are Stored In the
Individual Registration Buttons
Reverb Type
Reverb Depth
Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
Key Transpose
Left Foot Switch Assignment
Right Foot Switch Assignment
Damper Pedal Assignment
Aux Out ON/OFF
[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)
Harmony Intelligence Type
Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)
Rotary [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)
Bender/Glide Assignment
Pitch Bend Range
Pedal Bass Mode
Solo Mode
Solo To Lower Mode
Solo Split Point
[Bass Split] button (ON/OFF)
Bass Split Point
Sustain buttons (ON/OFF)
Sustain Length
Tx MIDI Channel
After Touch ON/OFF
Initial Touch ON/OFF
PC Number
Bank LSB
Bank MSB
Wall Type
The Voices assigned for each part
Level [
▲
][
▼
] (Part Balance Volume)
The Reverb depth for each part
The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice
The Octave settings for each part
The voices assigned to the [Others] buttons for each part
[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)
[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)
Drum/SFX Set
Manual Percussion Set
Selected Rhythm
[Intro/Ending] button (ON/OFF)
[Sync Start] button (ON/OFF)
Style Orchestrator
Variation ON/OFF
Chord Intelligence ON/OFF
Leading Bass ON/OFF
Arranger [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)
Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF)
Tempo setting
Volume of the rhythm Accompaniment part
Reverb depth of the rhythm Accompaniment part
Volume of the rhythm drum part
Reverb depth of the rhythm drum part
Volume of the rhythm bass part
Reverb depth of the rhythm bass part
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 255 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
256
Function...
Basic
Channel
Mode
Note
Number :
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Prog
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Message
Notes
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Default
Changed
Default
Messages
Altered
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
Key's
Ch's
0, 32
1
5
6, 38
7
10
11
16
64
65
66
67
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
84
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
: True #
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
: Clock
: Commands
: All sound off
:
Reset all controllers
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
1 (Solo)
2 (Pedal)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
11 (Drums/SFX)
16 (Expression, PC)
1–16
x
x
O
x 8n v=64
24–110
x
x
x
O
x
x
x
x
x
O
x
O
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0–127
**************
x
x
x
x
O
O
x
x
x
x
O
x
1 (Solo)
2 (Pedal)
3 (Lower)
4 (Upper)
11 (Drums/SFX)
16 (Expression)
1–16 (GM2/GS)
X
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4(M=1) * 10
O
x
0–127
0–127
O
O
O
O
0–127
O
x
x
x
x
x
O (120, 126, 127)
O
x
O (123–125)
O
x
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
General purpose controller (Glide)
Hold 1
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft
Resonance
Release Time
Attack Time
Cut off
Decay Time
Vibrato Time
Vibrato Depth
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
* 1 O x is selectable.
* 2 O x is selectable by SysEx. (GS Part)
* 3 Not received in the keyboard part
* 4 Can be received in the keyboard part
* 5 With MIDI IN Mode 2
* 6 With MIDI IN Mode 1
* 7 Received in GM2 mode
* 8 Received in GS mode
* 9 Received in General MIDI mode
* 10 Recognaize as M=1 even if M≠1.
Roland Organ
Model AT-60SL
Model AT-80SL Date : Mar 1, 2004
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
**************
**************
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Program number 1–128
*3, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*2, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*2, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8, 9
*4
*3, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8
*2, 7, 8
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*2, 8
*3, 7, 8
*3, 7, 8
*3, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*5
*5
*5
*5
*5
*5
*6
*2, 8
*2, 7, 8, 9
*3, 7, 8, 9
*7, 8
*7, 8
*7, 8, 9
*2, 7, 8, 9
*1
*1
*1
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 256 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
257
Demo Song List
* Some demo songs may not be programmed in the AT-60SL.
Song Title Composer Player Copyright
Film Score Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 2004 Roland Corporation
VivaTheater! Tony Fenelon Tony Fenelon © 2004 Roland Corporation
Accordions Ralf Shink Ralf Shink © 2004 Roland Corporation
Greensleeves Traditional Yuri Tachibana © 2004 Roland Corporation
Pop Organ Ralf Schink Ralf Schink © 2004 Roland Corporation
Pops Orch. Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 2004 Roland Corporation
Jazz Combo Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2003 Roland Corporation
Slow Waltz Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2003 Roland Corporation
Hawaiian Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2003 Roland Corporation
Dixieland Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2003 Roland Corporation
Country Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2003 Roland Corporation
Orchestra Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 2001 Roland Corporation
FastBigBand Rosemary Bailey Rosemary Bailey © 2001 Roland Corporation
Pipe&Choir Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 2001 Roland Corporation
Soprano W.A.Mozart Hector Olivera © 2001 Roland Corporation
Tenor Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 1999 Roland Corporation
PianoStrings Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 2001 Roland Corporation
Soft Gospel Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2001 Roland Corporation
Organ Swing Hal Vincent Hal Vincent © 2001 Roland Corporation
Acoustic Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 2001 Roland Corporation
Jazz Scat Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 1999 Roland Corporation
Pipe organ Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 1999 Roland Corporation
Orchestra2 Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 1999 Roland Corporation
Big Band Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 1999 Roland Corporation
TheaterOrgan Jonas Nordwall Jonas Nordwall © 1995 Rodgers Instruments LLC
Choir Hector Olivera Hector Olivera © 1999 Roland Corporation
Gregorian Ric Iannone Ric Iannone © 1999 Roland Corporation
Soprano2 Rachmaninov S. Hector Olivera © 1999 Roland Corporation
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 257 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
258
Demo Song List
Profile
Hal Vincent
Hal consistently delights his audiences with his keyboard artistry. He is equally at home on either the
organ, piano, or electronic keyboard. Around the world, his concerts generate the often heard
comment “....we loved it because he plays our kind of music.” This is another of Hal’s special skills: a
knack for knowing just what music to play on any occasion.
An extensive repertoire combined with more than 30 years of world touring have netted Hal rave
reviews while affording him the opportunity to work with some of the top names in show business.
Hal has recorded several albums and published books of organ arrangements while establishing
himself as an excellent clinician and teacher.
Hector Olivera
Hector Olivera was born in Argentina. He received his education at the Conservatory and the
University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New
York. Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious
places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York. Hector Olivera’s
expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ. Presently Olivera tours
internationally playing some of the world’s most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred
electronic organ, the Roland Atelier for which he continues to collaborate with its development.
Jonas Nordwall
A native of Portland, Mr. Nordwall received his Bachelor of Music Degree in 1970 from the University
of Portland studying with Arthur Hitchcock. Additional study was done with Frederick Geoghegan,
the noted English/Canadian organist. As a teenager, Jonas had the privilege to study with Richard
Ellsasser, one of the greatest virtuoso organist of 20th century.
Besides serving as Director of Music for the First United Methodist Church in Portland, Oregon and
as the Organist for the Oregon Symphony Orchestra.
He has been a featured recitalist for national conventions of the American Theatre Organ Society and
was Organist of the year for 1987.
Ralf Schink
Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9. After
completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern,
Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston. Since then, his energetic, contemporary
style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world. Ralf regularly performs
at the Frankfurt Musik Messe, the largest musical fair in Europe. A tremendously versatile and gifted
musician, Ralf is comfortable with all types of music. From pop to jazz, Ralf’s repertoire appeals to all
age groups. Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland Europe as demonstrator and
product consultant. He regularly tours Europe, Asia and Canada.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 258 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
259
Demo Song List
Ric Iannone
Ric Iannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half. By the time he was
seven, he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father. For more than 20
years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe,
delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements. He is equally
comfortable playing the organ, piano or keyboard, as a concert artist and product demonstrator.
Rosemary Bailey
Rosemary Bailey began playing the piano at the age of five, performing strictly classical music. She
soon diversified and incorporated jazz and traditional popular styles in her repertoire. By the time she
was nine years old, Rosemary had begun touring throughout the United states.
Concurrently, she maintained a weekly radio show, The Rosemary Bailey Show, broadcast from
Chicago.
Rosemary has performed with many name artists including Victor Borge and Peter Nero as well as the
Duke Ellington Orchestra. She was also featured soloist with the Chicago Symphony under the
direction of Dr. Leon Stein.
At home on electronic as well as pipe organs, her concert schedule has taken her to such countries as
Japan, South Africa, Canada, Italy, Spain, England, Holland, Denmark, Portugal, Germany and
Australia.
Rosemary’s unique arrangements involve the marriage of her classical and popular music
background. Perfect pitch enables her to effortlessly field requests from the audience and adds
spontaneity to all her programs.
Rosemary has developed a following of musical devotees wherever she performs and her numerous
recordings are sought after by young and old alike.
Tony Fenelon
Tony Fenelon studied at the Conservatory of Music in Melbourne, Australia under famed teacher Roy
Shepard. An internationally acclaimed artist, Tony has completed eighteen major concert tours
overseas including the United States, U.K. and Japan. He has released seventeen albums, including
four gold records. Tony has also been featured regularly as a solo pianist with the Australian
Philharmonic Orchestra and the Australian Pops Orchestra. In June of 2003, Tony learned that he had
been awarded the distinction of “Organist for the Year 2002” by the American Theatre Organ Society,
and 2004 was awarded the distinction of the Medal of the Order of Australia in Queen Elizabeth’s
Birthday Honours List for his contributions in music.
Yuri Tachibana
Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3, she switched completely to the organ after
winning First Prize in an organ competition. She has expanded her work to include a variety of
activities, releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the “11 PM”
TV program for four years. She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres,
including classical and jazz, is an accomplished arranger, and has published numerous scores. In 2002,
she released “Organ Chat” on the King Records label, with all of the album’s songs performed on the
Music Atelier. This album has won praise for the unique arrangements and impeccable performances.
Currently, Ms. Tachibana not only performs in Japan, she is also active in the U.S., Europe, China, and
around the world.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 259 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
260
Short Cut List
Quick Guide Function
Short Cut Screen/Setting
While the Quick Guide
screen is displayed,
Expression Pedal Controller screen/Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
[Bender/Vibrato] lever Controller screen/Bender/Vibrato
Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard screen/After Touch
Lower Keyboard Split Point screen
Pedalboard Pedalboard screen/PedalBass Mode
Left Foot Switch
Right Foot Switch
Controller screen/
L Foot Switch (Left Foot Switch)
R Foot Switch (Right Foot Switch)
Damper Pedal Controller screen/Damper Pedal
[Solo To Lower] button Split Point screen
[Bass Split] button Split Point screen
Sustain [Upper] button Upper Keyboard screen/Sustain Length
Sustain [Lower] button Lower Keyboard screen/Sustain Length
Sustain [Pedal] button Pedalboard screen/Sustain Length
Rotary [On/Off] button Effect screen/Rotary Color
Rotary [Slow/Fast] button Effect screen/Rotary Speed
[Count Down] button Rhythm Options screen/Count Down Sound
Upper Voice select buttons
Solo Voice select buttons
[Alternate] button
Upper Keyboard screen
Lower Voice select buttons
[Alternate] button Lower Keyboard screen
Pedal Voice select buttons
[Alternate] button Pedalboard screen
Registration [Write] button Registration Options screen/Arranger Update screen
[One Touch Program]
button Factory Reset screen
[Harmony Intelligence]
button Panel Reset screen
[Song] button
Song Clear screen
(If the performance data has never been saved to a floppy disk, the
Song Clear screen appears.)
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 260 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
261
Main Specifications
AT-80SL/60SL: MUSIC ATELIER
Controller/Function AT-80SL AT-60SL
Manual Keyboard Upper keyboard 56 notes (C3 – G7), Lower keyboard 76 notes (E1 – G7)
Pedalboard 20 notes (C2 – G3)
Touch Response Initial Touch with Sensitivity (10 levels for each Upper and Lower),
After Touch with Sensitivity (10 levels for only Upper)
Sound Generator Conforms to GM2/GS/XG Lite
Max. Polyphony 192 voices 128 voices
Voices 420 Voices
(included 31 Active Expression voices)
295 Voices
(included 15 Active Expression voices)
Upper Part Upper Organ, Upper Symphonic, Upper Orchestral
Lower Part Lower Organ, Lower Symphonic, Lower Orchestral
Solo Part Solo
Pedal Part Pedal Organ, Pedal Orchestral
Any two voices can be assigned to each [Others] button.
(One for Pedal Organ and Pedal Orchestral [Others] button.)
Rhythms 222 Rhythms in 10 Groups 182 Rhythms in 10 Groups
Disk Rhythm 12 Rhythms 8 Rhythms
Music Style Disk MSE, (MSA series; sold separately) can provide additional Music Styles.
Rhythm Customize Pattern editing of the internal rhythms (Drum Set, Beat, Tempo, Note)
Number of
Accompaniment/SMF play
voices
226 voices
Arranger Function
Arranger On/Off, Start/Stop, Sync Start, Intro/Ending, Intro Count Down, Break,
Fill In (To Variation, To Original), Style Orchestrator (Basic, Advanced 1, Advanced 2, Full),
One Touch Program, Chord Intelligence, Chord Hold, Leading Bass, Auto Standard Tempo
Music Assistant 1,600 settings
(4 variatoins for each 400 keywords)
1,200 settings
(4 variatoins for each 300 keywords)
One Touch Program 3,552 settings (16 settings for each rhythm) 2,912 settings (16 settings for each rhythm)
Drum/SFX Sets 18 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set 16 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set
Manual Percussion Sets 14 Sets 7 Sets
Master Tuning 415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz Steps)
Key Transpose -4 – +7 (in semitones)
Playback Transpose -24 – +24 (in semitones)
Effects Rotary Sound, Chorus, Sustain, Vibrato, Pitch Bend, Glide
RSS Reverb Reverb
Harmony Intelligence 18 Types 12 Types
Registration Memories 12 8
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 261 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
262
Main Specifications
Registration Functions Load Next, Disk Edit
Composer
Tracks 7 Tracks
Note Storage Approx. 40,000 notes
Song Length Max. 999 measures
Tempo Quarter note = 20–500
Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note
Recording Realtime (Replace, Punch In/Out, Loop)
Edit Function Delete Measure, Delete Track, Erase, Copy, Quantize
Metronome
Beat 2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
Volume 10 levels
Sound 4 types
Disk Storage: 3.5 inch micro floppy disk
Disk Format 720 K bytes (2DD), 1.44 M bytes(2HD)
Songs Max. 99 songs
Rated Power Output 10 W + 10 W + 60 W + 60 W
+ 100 W (low-range)
40 W + 40 W
Speaker
Full-range (small) 8 cm x 2 8 cm x 2
Full-range (large) 16 cm x 4 25 cm x 2
Woofer 30 cm x 1 —
Display Graphic 320 x 240 dots backlit Color LCD with touch screen
Score
Great Staff, G Clef Staff, F Clef Staff
with note name, with Lyric
(Built-in Display)
Lyric Yes (Built-in Display, Video Out) Yes (Built-in Display)
Pedal Expression Pedal (ready for the Active Expression feature), Damper Pedal
Foot Switches 2 pcs. (on the expression pedal, function assignable)
Connectors
Phones Jack (stereo), Audio Output Jacks (L/mono, R), Audio Input Jacks (L/mono, R),
Mic Input Jack, MIDI Connectors (In, Out), Computer Connnector, AC Inlet
Aux Out jack, Video Out jack —
Power Supply AC 117 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V
Controller/Function AT-80SL AT-60SL
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 262 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
263
Main Specifications
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
Power Consumption
340 W (AC 117V)
340 W (AC 230V)
340 W (AC 240V)
130 W (AC 117V)
130 W (AC 230V)
130 W (AC 240V)
Finish Dark Walnut Satin Mahogany
Dimensions
Console 1,350 (W) x 649 (D) x 581 (H) mm
53-3/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 22-7/8 (H) inches
1,338 (W) x 649 (D) x 568 (H) mm
52-11/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 22-3/8 (H)
inches
Stand 1,328 (W) x 596 (D) x 755 (H) mm
52-5/16 (W) x 23-1/2 (D) x 29-3/4 (H) inches
1,324 (W) x 596 (D) x 755 (H) mm
52-1/8 (W) x 23-1/2 (D) x 29-3/4 (H) inches
Total
1,350 (W) x 649 (D) x 1,328 (H) mm
53-3/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 52-5/16 (H)
inches
1,338 (W) x 649 (D) x 1,316 (H) mm
52-11/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 51-13/16 (H)
inches
Weight
Console 67.0 kg
147 lbs 12 oz
63.5 kg
140 lbs
Stand 61.5 kg
135 lbs 10 oz
45.5 kg
100 lbs 5 oz
Total 128.5 kg
283 lbs 5 oz
109.0 kg
240 lbs 5 oz
Accessories Owner’s Manual, 3.5 inch micro floppy disk (2HD blank disk), Music Style Disk x 3,
Power Cord
Controller/Function AT-80SL AT-60SL
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 263 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
264
Index
A
Active Expression Voice ............................................... 49
Aftertouch .................................................................... 184
Aftertouch Sensitivity ................................................. 184
Arranger function ......................................................... 68
Arranger Update ......................................................... 190
Automatic Accompaniment ........................................ 68
Aux Out ........................................................................ 210
Aux Out Mode ............................................................. 210
B
Bass Split ....................................................................... 140
Beat ................................................................................ 193
Bender/Vibrato ........................................................... 187
BMP Installer ............................................................... 198
Bouncing Ball ................................................................. 26
Break ....................................................................... 69, 118
Brilliance ....................................................................... 115
C
Calibration .................................................................... 197
Chord Hold .................................................................. 188
Chord Intelligence ......................................................... 70
Chorus Effect ............................................................... 127
Connecting
Audio Equipment .................................................. 205
Computer ................................................................ 206
MIDI Devices .......................................................... 208
Copy .............................................................................. 170
Copying
Rhythms on Disks into User Memory .................. 78
Rhythms Saved in User Memory to
Floppy Disks ............................................................ 81
Count Down ................................................................... 68
Count Down Sound .................................................... 189
Count In Play ............................................................... 153
Count-In Recording .................................................... 164
D
Damper Pedal ...................................................... 115, 186
Delete Measure ............................................................ 165
Delete Track ................................................................. 166
Deleting
Performance Songs ................................................ 160
Registrations on a Floppy Disk ........................... 108
Rhythms Stored in User Memory ......................... 87
Demo Song ..................................................................... 30
Demo Song List ........................................................... 257
Disk Edit ....................................................................... 110
Disk Rhythm .................................................................. 76
Drums/SFX .................................................................... 56
Drums/SFX Set List .................................................... 225
Drums/SFX Sets ............................................................ 57
E
Editing ........................................................................... 165
Effects ............................................................................ 122
Erase Event ................................................................... 168
Erasing
Performance Song .................................................. 156
Exp. Curve .................................................................... 121
Exp. Src (Play) .............................................................. 187
Exp. Src (Rec) ............................................................... 186
Expression Pedal ......................................................... 120
F
Factory Reset .................................................................. 23
Factory Setting
Disk button ............................................................... 80
Fill In ....................................................................... 69, 118
Foot Switch ........................................................... 117–118
Footage ............................................................................ 50
Formatting Disks ........................................................... 96
G
Glide .............................................................................. 118
H
Harmony Intelligence ................................................. 122
Headphones ................................................................... 21
Human Voice ................................................................. 47
I
Illumination .................................................................... 22
Replacing the Illumination Bulbs ........................ 251
Initial Touch Sensitivity .............................................. 185
K
Key Transpose ............................................................. 114
L
LCD Contrast ....................................................... 203–204
Leading Bass .......................................................... 72, 118
Load Next ..................................................................... 106
Loading
Individual Registration ......................................... 103
Performance Songs ................................................ 159
Set of Registrations ................................................ 101
Loop Recording ........................................................... 163
Lower Hold .................................................................... 60
Lower Voice ................................................................... 42
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 264 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
265
Index
Lyrics ............................................................................. 191
M
Main Screen .................................................................... 26
Background ............................................................ 200
Bouncing Ball ......................................................... 201
Manual Percussion ........................................................ 58
Manual Percussion List .............................................. 233
Manual Percussion Sets ................................................ 59
Master Tune ................................................................. 194
Metronome ................................................................... 192
Metronome Sound ...................................................... 193
Metronome Volume .................................................... 192
Mic Echo ....................................................................... 194
Microphone .................................................................... 22
MIDI .............................................................................. 208
MIDI IN Mode ............................................................. 196
Music Assistant .............................................................. 32
Music Assistant search ................................................. 34
Music Style Disk List .................................................. 246
N
Notation ........................................................................ 149
O
Octave Shift .................................................................... 54
One Touch Program ...................................................... 74
P
Panel Reset ..................................................................... 25
Part Balance .................................................................... 52
PC Number .................................................................. 195
Pedal Bass Voice ............................................................ 43
Pedal To Lower ............................................................ 142
PedalBass Mode ........................................................... 185
Pitch Bend Range ........................................................ 188
Pitch Bend/Vibrato ..................................................... 116
Play Transpose ............................................................. 191
Playing
Demo Song ............................................................... 30
Performance Song .................................................. 153
Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk ....... 145
Rhythm ...................................................................... 65
Punch-in Recording .................................................... 162
Q
Quick Guide ................................................................... 38
Index menu ............................................................... 38
Quick Registration ........................................................ 36
R
Recording ..................................................................... 143
Each Part Separately .............................................. 154
Performance ............................................................ 152
Re-Recording .......................................................... 155
Regist Shift .................................................................... 119
Registration
Arranger Update ...................................................... 92
Recalling a Registration .......................................... 91
Storing Registrations ............................................... 90
Registrations
Created on an Earlier Model ................................ 111
Rename
Performance Song .................................................. 156
Registration ............................................................... 94
Rhythms Stored in User Memory ......................... 85
Reverb Effect ................................................................ 130
Depth of the Reverb ...................................... 133–134
Reverb Type ............................................................ 131
Wall Type ................................................................ 132
Rhythm ........................................................................... 61
Rhythm Customize ..................................................... 173
Rhythm List .................................................................. 242
Rotary Effect ......................................................... 118, 124
Rotary Color ........................................................... 126
Rotary Speed .......................................................... 125
RSS Reverb ................................................................... 210
S
Saving
Performance Songs ................................................ 158
Registration Sets ....................................................... 98
Send PC Switch ............................................................ 195
SMF Format .................................................................. 159
SMF Music Files ........................................................... 145
Solo Mode ..................................................................... 138
Solo To Lower .............................................................. 137
Solo To Lower Mode ................................................... 138
Solo Voice ....................................................................... 44
Split Point
Bass Split Point ....................................................... 141
Solo Split Point ....................................................... 139
Style Orchestrator .................................................. 69, 118
Sub-window ................................................................... 28
Sustain Effect ................................................................ 128
Sustain Length ........................................................ 129
Sync Start ........................................................................ 66
T
Tempo ............................................................................. 67
Touch Screen .................................................................. 26
Tr. Mute (Track Mute) ................................................ 148
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 265 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
266
Index
Track Button ................................................................. 144
Track Mute ................................................................... 147
Track Mute button ...................................................... 148
Trans. Update (Transpose Update) .......................... 190
Transpose
Key Transpose ........................................................ 114
Play Transpose ....................................................... 191
TV Format .................................................................... 209
Tx MIDI Ch. (MIDI Transmit Channel ..................... 196
U
Upper Voice ................................................................... 42
User Memory ........................................................... 25, 62
User Rhythm ................................................................ 173
V
Video Out ..................................................................... 209
Voice ................................................................................ 40
Voice List ...................................................................... 220
Volume
Master Volume ......................................................... 21
Part Balance .............................................................. 52
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 266 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
267
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
As of November 1, 2003 (Roland)
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
PANAMA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
VENEZUELA
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
AUSTRALIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
MALAYSIA
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
SINGAPORE
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
VIETNAM
Saigon Music
Suite DP-8
40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street
Hochiminh City, VIETNAM
Tel: (08) 930-1969
JORDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
KUWAIT
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
TURKEY
Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat
Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
FRANCE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
POLAND
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
PORTUGAL
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
RUSSIA
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
UKRAINE
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
CZECH REP.
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 666 10529
AFRICA
CHILE
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
EUROPE
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
ASIA
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
NORTH AMERICA
MIDDLE EAST
AFRICA
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo ,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
IRAN
MOCO, INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing 100011
CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi
Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
Tel: (020) 8736-0428
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 267 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
268
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For EU Countries
For Canada
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
NOTICE
AVIS
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
AT-80SL_60SL_e.book 268 ページ ２００４年３月２３日　火曜日　午前９時３４分
’04-3-1N03676590

Navigation menu